JP6687083B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  There is a pachinko machine as a type of gaming machine. In a pachinko machine, for example, a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and if a game ball enters a predetermined starting ball entering means provided in the game area, a winning lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a hit state. Accordingly, the identification information (symbol) is variably displayed on the predetermined display means, and when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode based on the lottery result of the winning / winning lottery, a winning state advantageous to the player occurs.

  In addition, there are many gaming machines that give a high probability mode (so-called probability variation mode) in which the winning probability is increased as compared with the normal mode after the end of the specific winning state (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2004-000736, A

  In the above-exemplified gaming machine, improvement in interest is demanded.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the player.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention ,
A launching means for launching a game ball,
A game area where the launched game balls are guided,
Starting ball entering means arranged in the game area,
First lottery means for performing a first win / loss lot with a first winning probability due to entry of a game ball into the starting entry means.
Second lottery means for performing a second win / loss lottery with a second winning probability due to the entry of the game balls into the starting ball entry means,
A first special game state generating means for generating a first special game state advantageous to the player when a winning result is obtained by the first win / loss lottery,
A mode in which the lottery mode after the end of the first special game state can be switched and set to at least a normal mode and a specific mode in which the first winning probability is higher than the first winning probability in the normal mode. Switching means,
Mode determination means for determining the type of lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state related to the winning result, when a winning result is obtained by the first winning / boring lottery;
Second special game state generation means for generating a second special game state which is less advantageous than the first special game state when a result of the second win / loss lottery is obtained,
Display means capable of variably displaying predetermined identification information,
Production mode setting means capable of setting the production mode in the display means to various modes,
Based on the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means, effect control means for controlling the effect on the display means,
Equipped with
A gaming machine in which, when a winning result is obtained by the second winning / absence lottery, the first winning probability when the winning result is obtained is maintained as it is,
The production mode setting means,
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, an effect mode to be set when a winning result is obtained by the second win / loss lottery,
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a winning result is obtained by the first win / loss lottery, and the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state is switched to the normal mode by the mode switching means. When the production mode is set to
Can be set der to the same thing is,
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a winning result is obtained by the second win / loss lottery, and after the effect modes on the display means are the same, the lottery by the first lottery means is performed. When the number of times is equal to or more than a prescribed number, the player is provided with information transmitting means for issuing information indicating that the lottery mode is set to the specific mode,
The gist of the prescribed number of times is to include at least a first number of times and a second number of times .

Further, the gaming machine may be a pachinko machine.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view showing the state where the inner frame and the front frame set were opened. It is a front view showing a configuration of an inner frame, a game board and the like. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view showing a state where an inner frame, a back pack unit, and the like are opened. It is a block diagram which shows the main electric constitutions of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of various counters used for game control. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing by the main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the normal processing by the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart showing a start winning process. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd hit judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd jackpot type judgment processing. It is a flow chart which shows reach judgment processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st hit judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st big hit classification judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows a through gate passage process. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display setting process. It is a flow chart which shows setting processing at the end of fluctuation. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit setting process. It is a flow chart which shows return processing. It is a flowchart showing a variable winning device control process. It is a flow chart which shows the special prize state start processing at the time of a big hit. It is the flowchart which shows the variable winning a prize device control processing at the time of big hit. It is a flow chart which shows special prize sending processing at the time of a big hit. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot end setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special prize state start process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart showing a variable winning device control process at the time of small hit. It is a flow chart which shows special prize sending processing at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart showing a small hit end setting process. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an electric accessory control process. It is a flow chart which shows reception interruption processing of a payment control device. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing of a payment control device. It is a flow chart which shows command judgment processing of a payment control device. It is a flow chart which shows timer interruption processing of a payment control device. It is a flow chart which shows the normal processing of a sub-control device. It is a flow chart which shows command judgment processing of a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the update process of a counter. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of various counters used for determination of a symbol. It is a figure for explaining a hit classification. It is a figure which shows the structure of a 1st jackpot type determination table. It is a figure which shows the structure of a 2nd jackpot classification determination table. It is the figure which shows the constitution of the probability variation big hit time fluctuation pattern table of normal production mode. (A) is a figure which shows the storage structure of a 16R probability variation big hit time and fluctuation pattern table, (b) is a figure which shows a storage configuration of 8R probability variation big hit time and fluctuation pattern table, (c) is 2R It is a figure which shows the storage structure of a probability variation big hit time and fluctuation pattern table, (d) is a figure which shows the storage configuration of 2R time short big hit time and fluctuation pattern table, (e) is 2R normal big hit time or small hit It is a figure which shows the storage structure of a time / variation pattern table, (f) is a figure which shows the storage structure of the front / back deviation | variation reach time / variation pattern table, (g) is the reach time / variation pattern table except front / back deviation FIG. 3 (h) is a diagram showing the storage configuration of the complete deviation / variation pattern table. It is a figure which shows the symbol stopped and displayed at the time of 2R normal big hit or small hit. It is a figure which shows the structure of an opening / closing pattern control table. It is a figure which shows the structure of an opening command table. It is a figure which shows the structure of a round opening command table. It is a figure which shows the structure of a round closing command table. It is a figure which shows the structure of an ending command table. (A) is a figure which shows the structure of an open eye command table, (b) is a figure which shows the structure of a closed eye command table. (A) is a figure showing an effect performed when a hit occurs in the normal effect mode, and an effect mode from the time of the next change, and (b) an effect performed when a hit occurs in the probability variation effect mode. It is the figure which shows the production mode from the time of next and fluctuation. It is a figure showing an opening command, a round opening command (opening eye command), a round closing command (closing eye command), and an ending command which are set when a win is won in each effect mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the decorative pattern display device in a normal mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the decorative pattern display device in a normal mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the decorative pattern display device in a normal mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the opening production at the time of 8R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the opening production at the time of 8R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the opening production at the time of 8R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the opening production at the time of a 16R probability variation big hit. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the opening production at the time of a 16R probability variation big hit. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the opening production at the time of 8R probability variation big hit. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the production during opening at the time of 8R probability variation big hit or 16R probability variation big hit. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the production | production during closing at the time of 8R probability variation big hit or 16R probability variation big hit. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the ending production at the time of an 8R certainty big hit or 16R certainty big hit. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of a decorative symbol display device in a probability variation production mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the stop symbol displayed at the time of a 2R probability variation big hit, etc. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the opening production at the time of a 2R probability variation big hit, etc. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the hit production in 2R probability change big hit time etc. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of an ending effect at the time of a 2R probability variation big hit. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode of a decorative symbol display device in the latent probability production mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the hit production in 2R probability change big hit time etc. It is a schematic diagram which shows the opening production at the time of 2R time short big hit or small hit in the probability variation production mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hit production at the time of 2R time short big hit or small hit in the probability variation production mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the ending production at the time of 2R time short big hit or small hit in the probability variation production mode. It is a mimetic diagram showing an example of a display mode of a decorative design display device in a time saving mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the return production displayed on a decorative symbol display device. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the return production displayed on a decorative symbol display device. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the return process suggestive effect displayed on a decorative symbol display device. It is an enlarged front view showing another example of a starting winning opening. It is a flowchart showing another example of the jackpot end setting process. It is a figure which shows another example of a variable winning a prize device, (a) is an expansion front view, (b), (c) is an expansion plane perspective view. It is a figure which shows another example of a variable winning a prize device, (a) is an expansion front view, (b), (c) is an expansion plane perspective view. It is a flow chart which shows another example of small hit end setting processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the small hitting special state starting processing which is used when the return processing suggestion production is executed in the small hitting production. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a return process lottery effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a return process lottery effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a return process lottery effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a return process lottery effect. It is a flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end setting process used when a return process lottery effect is executed. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change end time setting processing used when returning processing lottery production is performed. It is a flow chart which shows an example of return processing used when returning processing lottery production is performed. It is a schematic diagram which shows the button display etc. which are displayed in return process lottery production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the button display etc. which are displayed in return process lottery production. It is the flowchart which shows the production button processing. It is a flow chart which shows another example of small hit end setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows another example of return processing. It is a mimetic diagram showing an example of return processing remaining number display effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a return process lottery effect. It is a flow chart which shows another example of small hit end setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows another example of return processing. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect displayed at the time of a big hit during a change. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect displayed at the time of a big hit during a change. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect displayed at the time of deviation when changing.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as "pachinko machine") will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. Here, FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view, and FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame set 14 are opened. FIG. 4 is a front view showing the configuration of the inner frame 12, the game board 30, and the like. FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame 12, the back pack unit 203 and the like are opened. However, in FIG. 3, for the sake of convenience, nails and accessories provided on the surface of the game board 30, the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14, and the like are omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 3 and the like, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and an inner frame 12 is supported on one side of the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. .

  As shown in FIG. 6 and the like, the outer frame 11 includes an upper frame component 11a and a lower frame component 11b made of a wooden plate material, and a left frame component 11c and a right frame component 11d made of an aluminum alloy. Each of the frame constituent parts 11a to 11d is made of a material and is assembled in a rectangular frame shape as a whole by a detachable fastener such as a screw.

  An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side frame component 11c (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower hinges 81 and 82 rotatably support the upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12, and thereby the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. Then, the inner frame 12 and the like are housed in the space formed inside the outer frame 11.

  Further, the right-side frame forming portion 11d is formed with an extending wall portion 83 protruding toward the inside of the outer frame 11 from the vicinity of the rear end portion in the width direction thereof. The extended wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the right side rear surface side of the inner frame 12 from the rear surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked are provided on the front surface side of the extension wall 83. Further, a pressing portion 86 that comes into contact with an inner frame opening detection switch 92 described later is provided on the lower receiving portion 85 so as to project toward the inner side of the outer frame 11.

  Further, a resin curtain plate decoration 87 is attached to the lower frame portion 11b. A rib 88 protruding upward is integrally formed on the inner surface of the upper surface of the curtain decoration 87. This makes it difficult to form a gap with the inner frame 12.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the opening / closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set vertically along the left side of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front, and the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with the opening / closing axis as an axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly configured by a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially oval window hole 39 is formed in the center of the resin base 38.

  A front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. Similar to the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened to the front side with an opening / closing axis line set vertically along the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 as an axis.

  Like the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape, and covers almost the entire front surface side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window portion 101 is formed in the center of the front frame set 14. Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) mounted on the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 1, on the front side of the front frame set 14, a lower tray 15 as a ball tray is provided at the center of the lower portion, and the game balls discharged from the outlet 16 are stored in the lower tray 15. It is possible. Further, on the front side of the lower plate 15, there is provided a ball removing lever 25 for discharging the game ball from the lower plate 15. In addition, an effect button 125 with a built-in LED is provided on the left part of the lower plate 15, and by pressing the effect button 125, a corresponding effect is performed in the decorative pattern display device 42 or the like described later. The content of the performance is changed.

  On the right side of the lower plate 15, a game ball launching handle (hereinafter, simply referred to as a handle) 18 is provided as an operating means protruding toward the front side. The handle 18 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) and an operation amount detecting means (not shown) for detecting the operation amount of the operation portion of the handle 18.

  An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15. The upper plate 19 is a ball receiving plate that temporarily stores the game balls and guides them toward a game ball launching device (hereinafter, simply referred to as launching device) 60 as a launching means while aligning them in a line. When the upper plate 19 is full of game balls, the game balls to be paid out are guided to the lower plate 15 via a lower plate communication passage 71 and a discharge port 16 described later.

  The upper plate 19 is provided with a ball lending button 121 and a return button 122. As a result, when the ball lending button 121 is operated in a game hall or the like with a banknote, a card or the like inserted in a card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, depending on the operation. The rental balls are supplied to the upper plate 19. On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. However, a ball lending button 121 and a return button 122 are not necessary in a so-called cash machine, which is a pachinko machine in which game balls are directly lent to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit.

  Further, the upper plate 19 is provided with a ball removing button 123. When the ball removal button 123 is pressed, a communication hole (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper plate 19 and communicating with the lower plate 15 is opened and stored in the upper plate 19. The game ball is guided (falls) to the lower plate 15. That is, the player can move the game ball on the upper plate 19 to the lower plate 15 at any time by operating the ball removing button 123.

  Further, a light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front surface of the front frame set 14. These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game by changing and controlling the light emitting mode such as lighting and blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. For example, a frame lamp 102 including a light emitting means such as an LED is provided on the periphery of the window 101. Further, an error display lamp 104 which is turned on at the time of a predetermined error is provided at a portion of the frame lamp 102 adjacent to both sides of the window portion 101. In the frame lamp 102, a large number of fine through holes are formed above the respective error display lamps 104 so as to correspond to the speakers SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front frame set 14.

  A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. The glass unit 137 is not a conventional pair of front and rear rectangular glass plates that are separately attached in front and rear pairs, but has a round shape as a whole and is assembled and then attached.

  Next, the inner frame 12 (resin base 38) will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12 (resin base 38) behind the window hole 39. The game board 30 is attached with its peripheral edge abutting against the back side of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38). Therefore, the substantially central portion of the front surface portion of the game board 30 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 of the resin base 38.

  In addition, in the lower part of the front surface of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, in the lower position of the window hole 39 (game board 30), a launching device 60 as launching means and a game ball immediately after being launched by the launching device 60 are provided. A guiding rail 61 for guiding is attached. In the present embodiment, a solenoid type launching device is adopted as the launching device 60. Further, above the launching device 60, a ball feeding device that guides the game balls guided from the upper plate 19 to the launching position of the launching device 60 one by one by driving the built-in driving means (for example, a solenoid). 63 are provided.

  Next, the configuration of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. On the game board 30, a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device (large winning opening) 32, an upper starting winning opening 33A, a lower starting winning opening 33B, a through gate 34, a variable display device unit 35, a first special display device 43L and. The second special display device 43R and the like are arranged in through holes formed by router processing, and are attached from the front side of the game board 30 with wood screws or the like. As is well known, when a game ball wins (wins) in various winning holes such as the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper starting winning opening 33A, and the lower starting winning opening 33B, it is detected by various detection switches and the upper plate 19 A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to (or the lower plate 15). For example, 3 when there is a winning in the upper starting winning opening 33A, 3 when there is a winning in the lower starting winning opening 33B, and 10 when there is a winning in the general winning opening 31. When there is a prize in the variable winning device 32, 15 game balls are paid out to the upper plate 19 (lower plate 15). In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an outlet 36, and game balls that have not won the various winning openings such as the general winning opening 31 are discharged to the outside of the game area through the outlet 36. .

  Here, the starting ball entering means in the present embodiment is composed of the upper starting ball entering means 33A and the lower starting ball entering means 33B, and the upper starting winning opening 33A constitutes the first starting ball entering means, and the lower starting winning opening is formed. 33B constitutes the second starting ball entering means. In addition, the variable winning device 32 constitutes a specific winning means.

  Further, on the game board 30, a large number of nails are implanted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are provided. As a result, it is adjusted so that the above-mentioned start winning holes 33A, 33B and the like will be won with an appropriate probability.

  The variable winning device 32 includes a large winning opening 32a in which a game ball can be won, and a rectangular flat plate-shaped opening / closing plate 32b as an opening / closing member that opens and closes the large winning opening 32a (corresponding to a "displacement member" in the present embodiment). And a special winning opening solenoid (not shown) that drives the opening / closing plate 32b to open and close.

  The variable winning device 32 is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the big winning opening 32a, while the big winning is made when a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as when a big hit or a small hit described later occurs. By energizing the mouth solenoid, the open / close plate 32b tilts forward with its lower side as a rotation axis, and the game ball enters an open state in which the game ball can be won into the special winning opening 32a.

  The upper start winning port 33A is always capable of winning a game ball. On the other hand, the lower starting winning port 33B is provided with an electric accessory 37 as an opening / closing type winning auxiliary device.

  The electric accessory 37 includes a pair of left and right movable blades 37a as opening / closing members that are pivotally displaced in the left-right direction about the lower end side, and a start winning opening solenoid (not shown) that drives the movable blades 37a to open and close. By opening and closing the movable blade 37a according to the establishment of a predetermined condition, the game ball flowing down the game area can be won in the lower start winning port 33B and the game ball can not be won in the lower starting winning port 33B. The state can be changed between the closed state and the closed state.

  As will be described later in detail, a first start winning prize switch 224A and a second starting prize winning switch 224B are provided at the upper starting winning prize port 33A and the lower starting winning prize port 33B, respectively, for detecting the game balls that have won. When a game ball is detected by the start winning award switch 224A, 224B, a first win / loss lottery for determining whether to generate a big hit state and a second win / loss lottery for determining whether to generate a small hit state are performed. In addition, the special display devices 43L and 43R (and the decorative pattern display device 42 described later) are variably displayed. Then, if the player wins in the first win / win lottery, the jackpot state is given, and if he wins the second win / win lottery, the jackpot state is given.

  Here, the jackpot type in the present embodiment will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 45, in the present embodiment, as the jackpot types, there are “16R probability variation jackpot”, “8R probability variation jackpot”, “2R probability variation jackpot”, “2R time shortening jackpot” and “2R regular jackpot”.

  In the jackpot state of "16R probability variable jackpot", "long open" is set as one special prize state, and this is repeated 16 times (16 rounds). In the jackpot state of "8R probability variation jackpot", "long open" is set as one special prize state, and this is repeated eight times (8 rounds).

  In the present embodiment, “long open” means that a predetermined time of 30 seconds elapses after the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state, or the number of the variable winning device 32 is equal to a predetermined number. It refers to one opening / closing operation until a closed state is obtained on condition that 10 game balls are won.

  In the jackpot state of “2R probability variable jackpot”, “short open” is set as one special prize state, and this is repeated twice (two rounds). Further, also in "2R short-time big hit" and "2R normal big hit", this is repeated twice (two rounds) with "short open" as one special prize state.

  In the present embodiment, “short opening” means that 0.4 seconds of the specified time has elapsed after the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state, or is defined in the variable winning device 32. It means one opening / closing operation until a closed state is obtained on condition that three game balls of a number are won.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball is launched toward the game area from the launching device 60 at a rate of one every "0.6 seconds" based on the operation of the handle 18 by the player. On the other hand, in the above "short open", the opening regulation time of the open / close plate 32b is 0.4 seconds. That is, in the case of "short opening", the opening time of the opening / closing plate 32b once is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, there is a case where even one gaming ball does not win the prize by only one "short opening". Therefore, the opening / closing plate 32b is rarely closed based on the condition relating to the winning number (three winning numbers) out of the two closing conditions corresponding to the "short opening", and the opening / closing plate 32b once opened. Will normally be closed after the elapse of a specified time (0.4 seconds). This prevents the execution period from changing each time during the "short open" execution period.

  Further, when the above-mentioned various “probable variation jackpots” occur, “high-probability mode (high-probability state)” (corresponding to “specific mode”) is given as the lottery mode after the jackpot state. On the other hand, when the “2R short-time jackpot” or the “2R normal jackpot” occurs, the “low probability mode (low probability state)” (corresponding to the “normal mode”) is given after the jackpot state ends.

  The “high-probability mode” refers to a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than that in the “low-probability mode” that is normally set. The "high-probability mode" set after the jackpot ends will continue until the next jackpot state occurs.

  In addition, after the completion of the various jackpots, the winning support mode for the electric accessory 37 is displayed until the special display devices 43L and 43R perform the variable display a predetermined number of times or until the next jackpot state occurs. As a result, a "high support mode (high ball entry state)" may be given.

  The "high support mode" means that the ratio of the open state to the closed state per unit time in the electric starting accessory 37 of the lower start winning port 33B is higher than that of the "low support mode (low ball entering state)" that is normally set. It means a state of increasing.

  For example, as the “high support mode”, (1) a state in which the variable display time in the later-described normal symbol display device 41 is shorter than that in the “low support mode”, (2) one time of the movable blade 37a of the electric accessory 37 A state in which the opening time (specified time) is longer than in the "low support mode", and (3) a specified number of game balls that can be won for each opening of the movable blade 37a is larger than in the "low support mode". , (4) When the winning result is obtained by the open lottery of the electric accessory 37 caused by the game ball passing through the through gate 34. The number of times the opening / closing process of the movable blade 37a is performed once is "low support mode". It is possible to state that the winning probability in the open lottery of the electric accessory 37 is higher than the winning probability in the “low support mode”. In the high support mode of this embodiment, the configurations of (1), (2), and (5) are adopted. Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of the configurations (1) to (5) or any combination of these configurations (1) to (5) may be adopted as the “high support mode”. As a result, it becomes easier for the game balls to win the lower start winning port 33B more frequently, the number of times the jackpot lottery is executed is increased, and the ball is held well.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the state where the “high support mode” is given, the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R are changed by changing the fluctuation pattern table described later to the table for the “high support mode”. The variable display time in the (decorative pattern display device 42) is configured to be shorter than that in the "low support mode".

  In the present embodiment, after the completion of the “16R certainty variation jackpot” and the “8R certainty variation jackpot”, the “high support mode” is given until the next jackpot state occurs. The "high support mode" is hereinafter referred to as "until next time / high support mode". In addition, after the completion of the "2R probability variable jackpot" in the "high probability mode", the "until next time / high support mode" is given. Further, even in the "low probability mode", the "until next time / high support mode" is given even after the "2R certainty variation jackpot" in the "time saving production mode" described later is finished. On the other hand, the "low support mode" is maintained after the "2R probability variation big hit" in the "low probability mode" other than the "time saving production mode" is completed.

  Further, after the completion of the "2R hour / hour jackpot", the "high support mode" is given while the variable display of 100 times is performed on the special display devices 43L and 43R. The "high support mode" is hereinafter referred to as "100 times high support mode".

  After the "2R normal jackpot" is basically given, the "low support mode" is basically given, but after the "2R normal jackpot" in the "time saving effect mode" or the "probability variation effect mode" described later is ended. , "100 times high support mode" is given.

  In this embodiment, various game states are generated by combining the various modes.

  For example, when a state in which the “high probability mode” and the “high support mode” are added is the so-called “probability change (probability change) mode”. In the "probability variation mode", when the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 42 clearly indicates that the effect mode is in a probable state, and when the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 42 is "time saving mode" described later. There are times when and when they become similar. Therefore, it may not be possible to distinguish between the “high probability mode” and the “low probability mode” based on the effect mode of the decorative symbol display device 42.

  When the “low probability mode” and the “low support mode” are provided, the so-called “normal mode” is set. In the "normal mode", when the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 42 is the normal effect mode ("normal effect mode"), and the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 42 is the "latency mode" described later. There is a time when it becomes the same as the time (“latent probability production mode”). Therefore, it may not be possible to distinguish between the “high probability mode” and the “low probability mode” based on the effect mode of the decorative symbol display device 42.

  When the “low probability mode” and the “100 times / high support mode” are added, the so-called “time saving (time reduction) mode” is set.

  When the “high probability mode” and the “low support mode” are added, the so-called “latent probability (latent probability change) mode” is set. In the “latent probability mode”, the jackpot probability is simply increased, and there is no difference on the surface from the case of the “normal mode”. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the state in which the “high probability mode” is given.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the various “big hits”, a “small hit” is generated when a predetermined result is obtained in the second win / loss lottery. In the small hit state, the variable winning device 32 is basically opened a plurality of times [in the present embodiment, a short time (for example, 0.4 seconds) similar to the above-mentioned "short open"). However, when the number of winning game balls to the variable winning device 32 exceeds a predetermined maximum possible winning number M1 (10 in this embodiment), the opening of two times ends. The variable winning device 32 is closed before the operation. For example, when the number of balls to enter the variable winning device 32 becomes equal to or more than the maximum possible winning number M1 in the first opening, the small hit state is finished without performing the second opening. Further, in the second opening, when the winning number of game balls to the variable winning device 32 (the total winning number of the first opening and the second opening) becomes equal to or more than the maximum possible winning number M1, the opening time in the second opening is 0. Even if it is less than 4 seconds, the variable winning device 32 is closed and the small hit state is finished.

  In addition, the lottery mode and the prize-winning support mode that are provided after the small hitting state ends are the original modes before the small hitting state occurs. For example, if the lottery mode before the small hit state occurs is the "high probability mode", the "high probability mode" is maintained even after the small hit state ends.

  In addition, as will be described later in detail, in the present embodiment, a game ball is awarded in the upper start winning port 33A and in a lower starting winning port 33B, and is awarded when the winning / winning lottery is won. The distribution of jackpot types is different. In case of winning or losing lottery triggered by winning a game ball to the upper starting winning opening 33A, one of "16R certainty variation jackpot", "8R certainty variation jackpot", "2R certainty variation jackpot" and "2R regular jackpot" In case of winning or losing lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the lower start winning hole 33B, it is distributed to one of the "16R certainty variation jackpot", "2R certainty variation jackpot", and "2R time reduction jackpot". Will be done. Further, the "small hit" is configured to be generated only when the winning / non-winning lottery is triggered by the winning of the game ball to the upper start winning hole 33A.

  The first and second special display devices 43L and 43R are each configured by two segment display devices and are installed in the lower part of the game board 30. Each segment display device is provided with eight display segments. Each display segment has an individual light source made of an LED, and by controlling the individual light sources to be turned on and off, only one arbitrary display segment can be turned on and at the same time an arbitrary group can be lit. The matching display segment can be illuminated. As a result, a predetermined symbol (including alphabets and numbers) is individually displayed on each segment display device.

  Then, the variable display is performed on the first special display device 43L triggered by the winning of the game ball into the upper starting winning opening 33A, and the second special display device 43R triggered by the winning of the gaming ball into the lower starting winning opening 33B. The variable display is made in. The display contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R are directly controlled by a main control device 261 as a main control means described later. The first special display device 43L constitutes a first special display means, and the second special display device 43R constitutes a second special display means.

  In addition, after the variable display is performed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, whether or not the jackpot lottery is won is definitely displayed according to the display mode when the variable display is stopped. It For example, when a game ball is won in the upper start winning opening 33A, the corresponding first special display device 43L displays a variable display at high speed, and when a predetermined time elapses, one of the display modes is stopped and displayed (for example, stopped for several seconds). ) Do. Then, when the jackpot lottery is won, numerical values and the like corresponding to various jackpots are displayed when the fluctuation stops, and a jackpot state occurs.

  For example, when "16R probability variation jackpot" is won, "9-" is stopped and displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, and when "8R probability variation jackpot" is won, first or "7-" is stopped and displayed on the second special display devices 43L and 43R. When "2R probability variable jackpot" is won, "2-" is stopped and displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, and when "2R hour short jackpot" is won, first or When "2 |" is stopped and displayed on the second special display devices 43L and 43R, and when "2R normal jackpot" is won, "2_" is stopped and displayed on the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R. . Furthermore, when the "small hit" is won, "2.-" is stopped and displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R. Here, particularly in order to enhance the effect of "2R certainty variation jackpot" in the "low probability mode", the stopping manner "2-" relating to "2R certainty variation jackpot" and the stopping manner "2_" relating to "2R normal jackpot" It is preferable that the stop mode "2.-" relating to the "small hit" is confusing. Further, particularly in order to enhance the effect of "small hit" in the "probability variation mode", the stop mode "2.-" related to "small hit" and the stop modes "2 |" and "2 | It is preferable that the stop mode “2_” related to “2R normal jackpot” has a confusing configuration.

  Of course, the stop mode of the special display devices 43L and 43R corresponding to various types of hits is not limited to the above mode. For example, there may be a plurality of stop modes of the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R indicating one hit type instead of one. For example, when "16R probability variable jackpot" is won, any of "91", "92", "93", ... Is selected and stopped and displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R. May be configured.

  Even when there are a plurality of stop modes of the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R indicating one hit type, there are a plurality of stop modes related to the “2R certainty variation jackpot” and “2R time / short jackpot”. It is preferable that the stop mode according to “1”, the stop mode related to “2R normal big hit”, and the plurality of stop modes related to “small hit” are confusing. For example, any one of “X−”, “X.−”, “X |”, “X _”, ... As a plurality of stop modes related to “2R probability variation jackpot” (X is, for example, “1”, "2", "3", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and "X.-", "X |", "X_", "X-", ... .. is displayed as a stop, and any one of "X |", "X_", "X-", "X-.", ... Is displayed as a stop mode related to "2R normal jackpot". As a plurality of stop modes related to "small hit", any of "X_", "X-", "X-.", "X |", ... May be stopped and displayed. In such a configuration, “X−”, “X−.”, “X |”, and “X_” are stop modes related to “2R probability variation jackpot”, stop modes related to “2R time / short jackpot”, “2R normal jackpot”. It is configured to be assigned to each of the stop mode according to "and the stop mode related to" small hit ".

  Further, the color displayed in any or all of the display segments may be changed appropriately.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball newly wins the starting winning opening 33A, 33B during the variable display of the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, the variable display for that time is at that time. It is configured to be performed after the end of the variable display performed in. That is, the variable display is on standby (held). Although the maximum number of the variable display to be held is determined for each model of the pachinko machine, in the present embodiment, the game ball that has won the upper start winning port 33A and the game ball that has won the lower starting winning port 33B. Corresponding to, the variable displays up to four times (total eight times of variable displays) are suspended. Further, the number of times of holding is lit and displayed by the first holding lamp 46a and the second holding lamp 46b. When a game ball newly wins the start winning port 33A, 33B during the big hit state, the variable display for that amount is also suspended.

  Basically, the variable display triggered by the winning of the upper starting winning opening 33A is stored in the order in which the corresponding game balls are won in the upper starting winning opening 33A, and is also consumed in the winning order, and the lower starting winning opening The variable display triggered by the winning of the prize in 33B is stored in the order in which the corresponding game balls are won in the lower start winning hole 33B and is consumed in the order of winning. However, when both the variable display triggered by the winning of the upper start winning port 33A and the variable display triggered by the winning of the lower starting winning port 33B are held (the first holding lamp 46a and the second holding lamp 46a). In the case where one or more holding lamps 46b are turned on), the variable display triggered by the winning of the lower start winning opening 33B is preferentially consumed. That is, unless all the variable displays triggered by winning on the lower start winning port 33B have been exhausted, the variable display triggered by winning on the upper starting winning port 33A is not displayed. For example, when one of the first holding lamps 46a is lit, a game ball is won in the lower starting winning opening 33B, and one second holding lamp 46b is lit, the winning in the upper starting winning opening 33A is won. The variable display triggered by the trigger is postponed, and the variable display triggered by the winning of the lower start winning port 33B is performed first. Hereinafter, for convenience of description, the variable display triggered by winning on the upper start winning port 33A is also referred to as "first variable display", and the variable display triggered by winning on the lower starting winning port 33B is called "second variable display". ".

  Further, the through gate 34 is configured so that the game balls flowing down the game area can pass one by one. As will be described later in detail, the through gate 34 includes a through gate switch 225 capable of detecting a game ball passing through the through gate 34, and when the game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, electric power is supplied. An open lottery is performed to determine whether or not the accessory 37 (lower start winning opening 33B) is opened, and the normal symbol display device 41 is configured to perform variable display. Then, when the player wins in the open lottery, the electric accessory 37 is opened for a specified time. The through gate 34 corresponds to the trigger ball means in this embodiment. In addition, the open lottery of whether or not to open the electric accessory 37 (the lower start winning opening 33B) constitutes the third winning / losing lottery in the present embodiment, and is performed by the function of the main control device 261 that executes this. A third lottery means in the form is configured.

  In the variable display device unit 35, a normal symbol display device 41 that variably displays upon passing through the through gate 34, and a decorative symbol display device that variably displays in accordance with the variable display by the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. And 42 are provided. The decorative symbol display device 42 constitutes the display means in this embodiment.

  Further, in the variable display device unit 35, a variation indicating which of the upper start winning port 33A and the lower starting winning port 33B the variable display performed on the decorative symbol display device 42 corresponds to. A specific lamp 40 is provided.

  The normal symbol display device 41 is configured to be able to light up and display "○" or "x" as a normal symbol, and for example, each time the game ball passes through the through gate 34, a normal symbol is changed from "○" to "x" → “○” → ... Then, when the variable display is stopped for a few seconds with the "○" symbol (the winning symbol), the electric accessory 37 of the lower start winning port 33B is opened for a specified time. The display content of this normal symbol display device 41 is directly controlled by a main control device 261 described later. The normal symbol display device 41 corresponds to the third display means in this embodiment.

  In addition, during the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41, when the game ball newly passes through the through gate 34, the variable display for that amount is performed after the end of the variable display performed at that time. Has become. That is, the variable display is on standby (held). The maximum number of variable displays to be held is determined for each model of the pachinko machine, but in the present embodiment, it is held up to four times, and the held number is displayed by the holding lamp 44. There is.

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is composed of a liquid crystal display device, and the display content is controlled by a sub control device 262 and a display control device 45 as sub control means described later. That is, in the decorative pattern display device 42, the sub-control device 262 performs an auxiliary operation based on the command from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the results displayed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. The display content is determined and displayed by the display control device 45 described later.

  As shown in FIG. 59 and the like, the decorative symbol display device 42 is provided with, for example, three symbol display regions of upper, middle and lower, and symbols (numerals) as plural kinds of identification information are sequentially provided in each symbol display region. The symbols are displayed (variably displayed), and then the symbols are stopped and displayed in order for each symbol display area (for example, in the order of the upper symbol display area → the lower symbol display area → the middle symbol display area). For example, when the "16R probability variation jackpot" or "8R probability variation jackpot" is confirmed in the main control device 261, a display corresponding to these jackpots is displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, and a decorative pattern is also given. The symbols are stopped and displayed on the display device 42 in a combination corresponding to these jackpots (for example, the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area are the same), and the jackpot state is obtained. Is started.

  Further, when "2R probability variable jackpot" is confirmed, or when "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit" is confirmed in the "normal effect mode" or "latent probability effect mode", the symbol is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. It is stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to these hits (for example, a special symbol that does not normally appear in the middle symbol display area (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "special symbol") is stopped and displayed), and the hit state is started. To be done. Thereby, the player, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area, based on the stopped symbol, "2R certainty variation jackpot" which is more advantageous to the player and "2R normal jackpot" which is not so advantageous Since it cannot be distinguished from “small hit” and “2R probability variation big hit” can be expected to occur, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the taste of the player.

  Furthermore, "2R regular big hit" or "2R normal big hit" or "probable variation production mode" (at this time, lottery mode is "high probability mode") or "time reduction production mode" is determined. When the "small hit" is confirmed, the symbols on the decorative symbol display device 42 are a prescribed combination corresponding to these hits (hereinafter, may be referred to as "a prescribed symbol combination." (It may be written as "design") (for example, "2" in the upper design display area, "4" in the middle design display area, "6" is displayed in the lower design display area), and the winning state Is started. Therefore, the player, based on the stop symbol, the lottery mode is switched to the "low probability mode" "2R short-time jackpot" and "2R normal jackpot", and the lottery mode is maintained "high probability mode" Since it cannot be distinguished from “small hit” and there is expectation for maintaining the “high probability mode”, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's taste.

  Incidentally, the combination of symbols corresponding to the big hit and the small hit can be appropriately changed. For example, the upper / middle / lower symbol display area depending on whether it is “2R probability variable jackpot”, “2R hour / hour jackpot”, “2R normal jackpot”, or “small hit” It may be configured such that the combination of the specific symbols stopped and displayed is different, or the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas may be the same. . Furthermore, when it becomes "2R probability variation big hit", "2R short-time big hit", "2R normal big hit" or "small hit", it will be displayed as a combination of random deviations on the surface, similar to the case of deviation. You may

  Furthermore, when the symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to "big hit" or "small hit", as the previous step, for example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area. The Rukoto. In this manner, the same symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area, and the state in which the variable display is still being performed in the middle symbol display area is the reach state. In addition, even if the reach state occurs, if "16R certainty variation big hit" or "8R certainty variation big hit" does not occur, it is different from the symbols stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area. The symbols other than these are stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area. Further, even if the reach state occurs, it may happen that the symbols such as the above-mentioned “specified symbol” are stopped and displayed.

  Further, the decorative symbol display device 42 (holding display area W3 described later) is configured to display the number of variable display holdings on the special display devices 43L and 43R corresponding to the holding lamps 46a and 46b ( (See FIG. 59 etc.).

  The special display devices 43L and 43R are provided in an unobtrusive place such as a lower corner of the game area that is difficult for the player to see, and the size of the display portion is small, and the time during which the characters for discrimination are stopped and displayed is relatively long. short. Therefore, it is practically impossible to grasp the game state to be given unless the eyes are carefully watched from the special display devices 43L and 43R and carefully observed.

  The variation specific lamp 40 is provided with an LED whose emission color is blue and an LED whose emission color is red, and in the decorative pattern display device 42, the variation display triggered by the winning of the upper start winning opening 33A is performed. In the case, the light is emitted in blue, and in the case where the variable display triggered by the winning in the lower start winning opening 33B is displayed, the light is emitted in red.

  Further, the variable display device unit 35 is provided with a center frame 47 so as to surround the decorative symbol display device 42. A ball entrance 151 is provided in the upper part of the center frame 47, and the game ball entered in the ball entrance 151 is formed inside the center frame 47 and along the side of the decorative symbol display device 42. It is guided on a stage 153 formed below the decorative pattern display device 42 via a warp flow path 152 extending vertically. The game ball guided on the stage 153 falls from the stage 153 to the front game area, or rolls on the stage 153 and then enters a pocket 154 formed on the inner side of the center of the stage 153. . Incidentally, the pocket 154 communicates with a guide passage 155 leading to the game area immediately above the upper start winning opening 33A, and the game ball that has entered the pocket 154 has a relatively high probability of coming up to the upper starting winning opening 33A. To win the prize.

  Further, the game board 30 is provided with a rail 50 which is composed of an inner rail constituent portion 51 and an outer rail constituent portion 52 and which guides a game ball shot from the launch device 60 to the upper portion of the game board 30. As a result, the game ball that has been launched along with the turning operation of the handle 18 is guided through the launch rail 61 and the rail 50 into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137.

  A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion in FIG. 4) of the inner rail forming portion 51. This prevents the situation where the game ball once guided from the rail 50 to the game area returns to the inside of the rail 50.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the outer rail component 52 is interrupted at the upper right portion of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 is interrupted at the lower right portion of the game board 30. Therefore, the game area is defined by the rail 50 and the inner peripheral surface of the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, until the game ball hit by the launching device 60 passes through the return ball prevention member 53, the rail 50 may flow backward, so that the parallel portions of the inner and outer rail components 51 and 52 are removed from the game area. Get burned.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a ball passage unit 70 is provided below the window 101 on the back side of the front frame set 14. The ball passage unit 70 is provided with a lower plate communication passage 71 connected to a discharge mechanism section 352, which will be described later, to the outlet 16 of the lower tray 15, and an upper plate communication passage 73 connected to the upper tray 19 from the discharge mechanism section 352. Further, there is a gap between the launch rail 61 provided on the inner frame 12 and the rail unit 50 (outer rail forming portion 52) at a predetermined interval, and the ball passage unit 70 stores the game balls dropped from the gap. A foul ball passage 72 is formed for guiding to the lower plate 15. As a result, if the game ball fired from the launching device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns backward on the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball goes to the lower plate 15 via the foul ball passage 72. Is discharged.

  Reference numeral 67 in FIGS. 3 and 4 is a payout passage for guiding the game balls paid out by a payout mechanism portion 352, which will be described later, to the front of the inner frame 12, and the upper plate communication passage 73 (upper plate 19). And a passage leading to the lower tray communication passage 71 (lower tray 15). A shutter 68 is provided below the payout passage 67, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the shutter 68 projects forward due to the biasing force of a spring or the like to substantially close the outlet of the payout passage 67. ing. Further, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the rear end portion of the lower plate communication passage 71 on the inlet side. In addition, the inlets (ball inflow portions) of the lower plate communication passage 71 and the upper plate communication passage 73 are adjacent to each other, and in the closed state of the front frame set 14, the respective inlets and the payout passage 67 are separated from each other by a predetermined distance, A game ball can pass through the gap between the two. Therefore, when the upper plate 19 and the upper plate communication passage 73 are filled with game balls, the game balls to be dispensed flow to the lower plate communication passage 71 side (overflow to the inlet side of the lower plate communication passage 71), and the lower plate connection It will be discharged to the lower plate 15 through the passage 71.

  In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) for detecting the game balls located in the lower plate communication passage 71. By the existence of the full detection switch, it is understood that the lower plate 15 is full of game balls (the lower plate 15 is full of game balls and the game balls are staying in the lower plate communication passage 71). be able to. In the present embodiment, control is performed such that the launch of the launching device 60 is prohibited based on the game ball being continuously detected for a predetermined time by the full detection switch. It should be noted that when the game balls are no longer retained in the lower plate communication passage 71 and the game balls are no longer detected by the full detection switch (when they are not detected for a predetermined period of time), launching of the launching device 60 is permitted.

  Next, the rear structure of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. On the back surface of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally so that they are partially overlapped with each other in the front and back. Further, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying game balls. A protective cover made of resin or the like is attached. Since the payout mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion may be generally referred to as a back pack, the unit is referred to as a "back pack unit 203" here.

  First, the rear structure of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, on the rear side of the variable display device unit 35 (see FIG. 4) arranged corresponding to the through hole in the center of the game board 30, a resin frame cover for covering the center frame 47 from behind is provided. 213 is provided so as to project rearward. Further, on the back side of the frame cover 213, the decorative pattern display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device facing the front from the opening of the frame cover 213, the display control device 45, and the sub control device 262 can be attached and detached in a state of being stacked in front and back. Is attached to.

  The decorative pattern display device 42 is housed in a housing box 42b formed with an opening for exposing the display portion (liquid crystal screen) of the decorative pattern display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and the rear surface of the frame cover 213. It is fixed to the side. The display control device 45 is housed in the substrate box 45a and is fixed to the back side of the decorative pattern display device 42 (housing box 42b). The sub control device 262 is housed in the substrate box 262a and fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (substrate box 45a). In the frame cover 213, an LED control board for driving the LEDs and the like built in the center frame 47 is provided. Further, the housing box 42b and the substrate boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the inside thereof is visible.

  Below the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the starting winning openings 33A and 33B, and the like from behind. The back frame set 215 includes a ball collecting mechanism (not shown) for collecting the game balls that have won the various winning openings. The game balls collected by this ball collecting mechanism are guided to a discharge passage portion 217 described later, and discharged from the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main control device 261. More specifically, the board box 263 having the main controller 261 mounted thereon is rotatably supported by the back frame set 215 and can be opened rearward.

  Main controller 261 is housed in substrate box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The substrate box 263 connected by the sealing member is configured so that it cannot be opened without leaving a predetermined trace. As a result, it can be easily found that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

  In addition, the game board 30 is provided with a winning detection switch (ball detecting means) that corresponds to various winning openings such as the general winning opening 31 and detects a game ball that has won the various winning openings. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a winning opening switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning opening 31, and a variable winning device 32 is provided with a count switch 223. Further, the upper starting winning opening 33A is provided with a first starting winning switch 224A, and the lower starting winning opening 33B is provided with a second starting winning switch 224B. Further, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34.

  Although not shown, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first board surface relay board electrically connected to the winning opening switch 221, the count switch 223, and the through gate switch 225 via a cable connector. . The first board-side relay board relays the winning opening switch 221 and the like and the main controller 261 and is electrically connected to the main controller 261 via a cable connector.

  On the other hand, the start prize winning switches 224A and 224B for detecting the prizes at the start winning holes 33A and 33B are directly connected to the main controller 261 via the connector cable without passing through the relay board.

  The detection results detected by the various winning detection switches are taken into the main controller 261. Then, the main controller 261 sends a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid) according to the winning situation at each time to the payout controller 311, and a predetermined number of game balls based on an output signal from the payout controller 311. Is paid out (except when detected by the through gate switch 225).

  Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is one in which a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism 352 are integrated. The back pack unit 203 is openably and closably supported with respect to the left side portion (the right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward with an opening / closing axis extending along the vertical direction as an axis. ing. In addition, an external relay terminal plate 240 is provided at the upper left portion (upper right portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203.

  The external relay terminal board 240 is for relaying various information transmissions to a hall computer or the like in a game hall, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For the sake of convenience, no reference numeral is attached, but for example, a terminal for outputting information about the current game state (big hit state, high probability mode, etc.), front frame set 14 or inside detected by open detection switches 91, 92 described later. A terminal for outputting information regarding opening of the frame 12, a terminal for outputting information regarding various error states such as a winning error, a lower tray full error, a tank ball out error, a dispensing error, and a prize paid out from the payout control device 311. A terminal or the like for outputting information regarding the number of balls is provided.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, a terminal is provided for outputting information on "small hit", and the information on occurrence of "small hit" is output. It may be configured not to output.

  The back pack 351 is integrally formed of ABS resin, for example, and is provided with a protective cover portion 354 that projects rearward of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is open, and has a size large enough to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in the present embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 is configured to cover the upper portion and the right portion (the left portion in FIG. 5) of the substrate box 263 as well. As a result, in the closed state of the back pack unit 203, the sealing member provided on the right part of the board box 263 and the terminal part (board-side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main control device 261 are covered. It will be.

  The payout mechanism section 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover section 354. That is, above the protective cover portion 354, a tank 355 having an opening on the upper side is provided, and the tank 355 is successively replenished with game balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall. Below the tank 355, for example, a tank rail 356 having two rows of ball passages in the horizontal direction and gently sloping toward the downstream side is connected, and further, a case rail 357 is vertically provided on the downstream side of the tank rail 356. It is connected. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 357, and the required number of game balls is appropriately paid out by a predetermined electric configuration such as a payout motor. Then, the game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper plate 19 and the like.

  Further, in the payout mechanism unit 352, a payout relay board 381 that relays a signal of a payout command from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358 is installed, and a power switch board 382 that takes in a main power source from the outside is installed. There is. The power switch board 382 is supplied with a main power of, for example, 24 V AC via a voltage converter, and is turned on or off by a switching operation of the power switch 382a.

  Below the back pack unit 203 (substrate box 263), a lower frame set 251 which is pivotally supported by the left side portion (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12 and which can be opened rearward is provided. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage portion 217 into which the game balls collected by the above-mentioned ball collecting mechanism flow, and the game balls are provided at the most downstream portion of the discharge passage portion 217. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging the pachinko machine 10 to the outside is formed. That is, the game balls that have won the respective winning openings such as the general winning opening 31 are collected through the ball collecting mechanism of the back frame set 215 and further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharging chute of the discharging passage portion 217. The outlet 36 also leads to the discharge passage portion 217, and the game balls that have not won any of the winning openings are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the discharge chute. In addition, in the present embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. It may be done.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the lower frame set 251, a payout control device 311, a launch control device 312, a power supply device 313, and a card unit connection board 314 as payout control means are stacked in front and back. It is detachably attached.

  The firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are housed in the board box 313a and fixed to the back surface side of the lower frame set 251. Although the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are described as independent control devices for convenience, they are actually configured by one board (printed board).

  The payout control device 311 is housed in the board box 311a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313). The board box 311a in which the payout control device 311 is housed is provided with a sealing member in the same manner as the board box 263 in which the main controller 261 is housed, so that the trace of the unsealed board box 311a remains. Has become.

  In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is housed in the board box 314a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313).

  The substrate boxes 311a, 313a, 314a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually confirmed.

  Further, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 projecting outward from the board box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor unit occurs, the dispensing motor is rotated in the forward and reverse directions to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state).

  Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 protruding outward from the board box 313a. The pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, and can maintain the state at the time of power failure even if a power failure occurs, and can restore the state at the time of power failure at the time of recovery from the power failure (power recovery). it can. Therefore, when the power is shut off in the normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power shutdown is stored and retained. Therefore, when the user wants to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, the power is pressed while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Throw in.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the right side rear surface side of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 is provided with a cylinder lock 700 (see FIG. 1 and the like) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14, and a key is inserted into a key hole of the cylinder lock 700, and the cylinder lock 700 is rotated to one side to move the inside. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating the frame 12 to the other side. In this embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

  As described above, the right side frame forming portion 11d of the outer frame 11 is formed with the extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (FIG. 5). reference). As a result, it becomes difficult to allow the wire rod or the like to enter from the back side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 with the wire rod or the like. As a result, the defense performance can be improved. Furthermore, the extending wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and when the inner frame 12 is closed, The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a front frame opening detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided at the lower right portion on the front surface side of the inner frame 12 (on the right side of the launching device 60). As shown in, an inner frame opening detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided at the lower right portion on the rear surface side (lower left in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12. The front frame opening detection switch 91 and the inner frame opening detection switch 92 each include a detection unit that can be retracted from and into the switch body. The front frame opening detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection unit faces forward. The inner frame opening detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection portion faces rearward. Then, when the detection unit is in a state of protruding from the switch body, it outputs an ON signal to the main control device 261, and when the detection unit is pressed toward the switch body and is immersed in the switch body, an OFF signal is output. It is configured to output to the main controller 261. That is, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the front frame opening detection switch 91 is turned off by the detection unit being pressed by the back surface of the front frame set 14, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the detection unit returns to the protruding state. Turns on. Similarly, the inner frame opening detection switch 92 is turned off when the inner frame 12 is closed by the pressing part 86 formed integrally with the receiving part 85 of the outer frame 11 to detect the detection part. The part returns to the protruding state and is turned on.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main controller 261 (main board) is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The CPU 501 has a ROM 502 that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 501 and fixed value data, and a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 502 is executed. And various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit. However, the CPU, the ROM, and the RAM may not be integrated into one chip, but may be configured into a chip for each function.

  The RAM 503 includes a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of a control program executed by the CPU 501 are stored, and a work area (work area in which various flags, counters, I / O values, etc. are stored. ) And a backup area 503a.

  Further, the RAM 503 is configured such that a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 313 and data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and the RAM 503 is stored in the stack area, the work area, and the backup area 503a. All data is backed up.

  In the case where the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the backup area 503a is in a power-off state (including a power outage in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power is turned off when the power is turned on again. This is an area for storing the values of stack pointers, registers, I / O, etc. The writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is turned off by the main processing, and conversely, the restoration of each value written to the backup area 503a is the main processing when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination. The same applies hereinafter). Executed in. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to receive a power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. Upon occurrence, the power failure process (NMI interrupt process) is immediately executed.

  Note that if at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a is backed up, it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

  An input / output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 having the ROM 502 and the RAM 503 built therein through a bus line 504 including an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a sub-control device 262, first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, a normal symbol display device 41, etc. are connected to the input / output port 505. With this configuration, the special display devices 43L and 43R and the normal symbol display device 41 described above are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled via the sub control device 262.

  In addition, although illustration of various relay boards and the like is omitted for convenience, various detection switches such as a winning opening switch 221, a count switch 223, starting winning unit switches 224A and 224B, a through gate switch 225, etc. are provided in the input / output port 505. Various electric components such as various substrates are connected. That is, the main controller 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (board side connectors) for connecting the connectors of various cable connectors, and these terminal portions and the like constitute the input / output port 505.

  The sub-control unit 262 (sub-control board) includes a CPU 551 which is an arithmetic unit, various control programs executed by the CPU 551 and a ROM 552 which stores fixed value data, and various control programs which are stored in the ROM 552. A RAM 553, which is a memory for temporarily storing data and the like, an input / output port 554, a bus line 555, and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit (not shown) are provided. The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

  The CPU 551, the ROM 552, the RAM 553, and the display control device 45 are connected to the input / output port 554 via the bus line 555. Further, the input / output port 554 is connected to the speaker SP, the effect button 125, various illumination parts and the lamps 102 and 104.

  The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on a command (for example, a “fluctuation pattern command”) transmitted from the main control device 261, and causes the decorative pattern display device 42 to display. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R controlled by the main control device 261 are adapted to display whether or not they are a big hit, and the sub control device 262. In the decorative pattern display device 42 controlled by, display is performed in accordance with the display of the special display devices 43L and 43R.

  Further, the payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 512 storing a control program executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 is, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the CPU 511, the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511, various flags and counters, A work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored and a backup area 513a are provided.

  The RAM 513 is configured such that a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 313 and data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and all the data stored in the stack area, the work area, and the backup area 513a is stored. Is backed up. Note that if at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a is backed up, it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

  The backup area 513a has a stack pointer at the time of power-off, each register, in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power-off when the power is turned off and the power is turned off again. This is an area for storing values such as I / O. The writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is turned off by the main processing, and the restoration of each value written in the backup area 513a is executed in the main processing when the power is turned on. Note that, similarly to the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is also configured such that the power failure signal SK1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  In the work area, a "payout permission flag" in which the payout control device 311 permits payout of prize balls, and a "command reception flag" set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, A command buffer for storing commands transmitted from main controller 261 is provided.

  The “payout permission flag” is a flag for setting permission for payout of prize balls, and is turned on when a specific command for permitting payout of prize balls is transmitted from the main control device 261 and the specific command is received, It is turned off when the process is returned to the initial setting process or before the power is cut off. In the present embodiment, the specific commands include a “payout initialization command” for instructing initial processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a “prize ball command” for instructing payout of prize balls, and a main controller 261. These are the three “payout return commands” that are transmitted when the power is restored.

  The “command reception flag” is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command, and is turned on when any of the commands is received, and like the “payout permission flag”, is set to the initial setting. It is turned off when the process is returned to before the power-off, and is turned off when the command received by the command determination process is determined.

  The command buffer is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from main controller 261.

  An input / output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 including the ROM 512 and the RAM 513 via a bus line 514 including an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erasing switch circuit 543, a main control device 261, a firing control device 312, a payout device 358, etc. are connected to the input / output port 515.

  The card unit connection board 314 is a ball rental operation unit (ball lending button 121 and return button 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10 and a card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. Are electrically connected to and, respectively, to take in a ball lending operation command from the player and output it to the card unit. Note that the card unit connection board 314 may be omitted in a cash machine in which game balls are directly lent to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit.

  The launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch device 60, and the launch device 60 is allowed to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, a discharge permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, a sensor signal indicates that the player is touching the handle 18, and a discharge stop switch for stopping the discharge is operated. The launching device 60 is driven on the condition that the gaming ball is not launched, and the gaming ball is launched at a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the handle 18.

  The display control device 45 executes variable display of symbols on the decorative symbol display device 42 in accordance with an instruction from the sub-control device 262. The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530 and 531. It has and. The input / output port 554 of the sub control device 262 is connected to the input port 527. Further, the CPU 521, the program ROM 522, the work RAM 523, and the VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via the bus line 530. Further, an output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531 and a decorative symbol display device 42 which is a liquid crystal display device is connected to the output port 529.

  The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received command, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received command to control the VDP 526. (Specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 526) is executed. Thereby, the display control in the decorative pattern display device 42 is performed.

  The program ROM 522 is a memory that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 521 and fixed value data, and the work RAM 523 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. Is.

  The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524, the display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 is changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory for storing character data such as a design displayed on the decorative design display device 42.

  The VDP 526 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal drive circuit) incorporated in the decorative pattern display device 42. Since the VDP 526 is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and the substance thereof should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated for drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the respective timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524 and the like to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and at the same time, reads the display data stored in the video RAM 524 to display it on the decorative symbol display device 42.

  The power supply device 313 also includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies electric power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 connected to the RAM erase switch 323. It has and.

  The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operating power to each of the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 541 takes in an AC 24V power supply supplied from the outside and generates + 12V power supply for driving various switches and motors, + 5V power supply for logic, backup power supply for RAM backup, and the like. The + 12V power source, the + 5V power source, and the backup power source are supplied to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. The firing control device 312 is supplied with operating power (+ 12V power supply, + 5V power supply, etc.) via the payout control device 311. Similarly, operating power is supplied to various switches, motors, and the like via a control device to which they are connected.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each of the NMI terminals of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and when this voltage is less than 22V, determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred, The power failure signal SK1 is output to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. By the output of the power failure signal SK1, the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the power failure time processing (NMI interrupt processing).

  Note that the power supply unit 541 normally outputs the output voltage of 5 V, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the power failure process even after the DC stable voltage of 24 V becomes less than 22 V. It is configured to maintain a value. Therefore, the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

  The RAM erasing switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erasing switch 323 and clears the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main controller 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout controller 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs the RAM erase signal SK2 to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erasing switch 323 being pressed down (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure), the data in the RAMs 503 and 513 in the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311 are cleared. It

  Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

  First, the operation of main controller 261 will be described. In the present embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 is supposed to perform a lottery by using various counter information during a game.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, a winning random number counter C1 used in a winning lottery (win / win lottery) for determining whether to generate a big hit state or a small hit state, and a jackpot type determination used in determining the jackpot type. Initialization of a counter C2, a reach selection counter C3 used for determining whether or not a reach state is generated when the decorative pattern display device 42 is fluctuated, and a type of reach to be generated, and a winning random number counter C1. Random number initial value counter CINI used for value setting, determination of variable display time of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative pattern display device 42), and variation pattern (decorative pattern) in the decorative pattern display device 42. Of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 used for the determination etc. of the normal symbol display device 41 (the electric accessory 3 of the lower start winning port 33B) It is set to be used and normal symbol random number counter C4 for use in the open state to whether an open draw).

  Each of the counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS1, CS2, C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the upper limit value, it returns to 0 which is the lower limit value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (excluding the random number initial value counter CINI).

  The RAM 503 is provided with a special fluctuation holding area in which the values of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type determination counter C2, and the reach selection counter C3 are stored, and a normal fluctuation holding area in which the values of the normal symbol random number counter C4 are stored. Has been. The normal variable holding area includes one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to holding fourth areas).

  The special variation reservation area includes a first special variation reservation area and a second special variation reservation area, each of which includes four reservation areas (reservation first to reservation fourth areas), and one execution area.

  In each holding area of the first special variation holding area, the respective values of the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type determination counter C2, and the reach selection counter C3 are time-series according to the winning history of the game ball to the upper starting winning opening 33A. Are stored in the memory. The first special variation holding area constitutes a first holding means.

  In each holding area of the second special variation holding area, the respective values of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type determination counter C2, and the reach selection counter C3 are time-series according to the winning history of the game ball to the lower start winning hole 33B. Are stored in the memory. The second special variation holding area constitutes second holding means.

  In the execution area and each of the holding areas in the special variation holding area, a hit random number storage area that stores the value of the hit random number counter C1, a jackpot type random number storage area that stores the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2, and a reach selection counter C3. A reach random number storage area for storing the value of is provided.

  In each holding area of the normal fluctuation holding area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is stored in time series according to the passage history of the game ball to the through gate 34.

  By adopting such a configuration, the variable displays on the special display devices 43L and 43R and the normal symbol display device 41 can be held up to four times each as described above.

  Explaining each counter in detail, the hit random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 398, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 398) as the final value, it is the lower limit value 0 as the opening value. It is configured to return to. Normally, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 398), and is updated once for each timer interrupt and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the hit random number counter C1 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt), and the value of the hit random number counter C1 is stored in the hit random number counter buffer. The value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the hit random number counter buffer is the first special fluctuation reserved area or the second special fluctuation at the timing when the game ball wins the upper start winning hole 33A or the lower starting prize hole 33B. Stored in the hold area. Therefore, such processing constitutes a part of the first win / win lottery and the second win / win lottery.

  Two types of random number values for jackpots are set in the "low-probability mode" and "high-probability mode". In the present embodiment, the number of random number values for jackpots is "low probability mode". The number is one and the value is “7”. In the “high probability mode”, the number of random number values that are a big hit is 10, and the value is “7 to 16”. That is, in the "low probability mode", there is a probability of 1/399 to win or lose the win lot (a big hit state occurs), and in the "high probability mode", there is a probability of 1 / 39.9 to win or lose the lottery. Become. These winning probabilities correspond to the first winning probabilities.

  In the present embodiment, a jackpot win / loss determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot is provided in the ROM 502. In the present embodiment, there are two jackpot win / loss determination tables, and there are a first jackpot win / win determination table that stores “7” and a second jackpot win / win determination table that stores “7 to 16”.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, a small hit / win determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 corresponds to the small hit is provided in the ROM 502. The number of random number values to be a small hit is 10, and the value is “101 to 110”. That is, the winning / winning lottery is won (a small hit state occurs) with a probability of 1 / 39.9. This winning probability corresponds to the second winning probability. The small hit win / loss table is referred to only in the win / loss lottery resulting from the winning of the game ball to the upper start winning hole 33A.

  The jackpot type determination counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 49, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 49), returns to the lower limit value of 0. In the present embodiment, the jackpot type determination counter C2 assigns a jackpot type, that is, "16R probability variation jackpot", "8R probability variation jackpot", "2R probability variation jackpot", "2R time-short jackpot", or "2R regular jackpot". Is decided.

  The ROM 502 is provided with a jackpot type determination table that is referred to when determining which jackpot the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 corresponds to. Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot type is different depending on whether the game ball wins the upper starting winning opening 33A or the lower starting winning opening 33B. That is, in the present embodiment, there are two jackpot type determination tables, and the first jackpot type determination table that is taken into consideration when a game ball wins the upper starting winning opening 33A and the gaming ball to the lower starting winning opening 33B. There is a second jackpot type determination table that is taken into consideration when a prize is won.

  Specifically, when the game ball wins the upper start winning hole 33A, the first jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 46) is taken into consideration, and if the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is "0 to 19". The "16R probability variation jackpot" is decided. Further, if the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is "20 to 39", it is determined that "8R certainty variation jackpot" is given, and if the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is "40", "2R certainty variation jackpot". Is given. Furthermore, if the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is "41 to 49", the grant of "2R normal jackpot" is determined.

  In other words, if you win the jackpot lottery that is triggered by winning the prize in the upper start winning port 33A, there is a 40% chance of being a "16R probability variation jackpot", and a 40% probability of being an "8R probability variation jackpot", which is 2%. There is a probability of "2R probability variation jackpot" and a probability of 18% is "2R regular jackpot".

  On the other hand, when the game ball wins the lower start winning port 33B, the second jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 47) is taken into consideration, and if the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is "0 to 39", " 16R certainty variation jackpot is determined, "2R certainty variation jackpot" is determined, and "41 to 49" is determined, "2R time reduction jackpot" is determined.

  That is, when winning or failing the lottery triggered by winning at the lower start winning port 33B, there is an 80% probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" and a 2% probability of "2R probability variation jackpot", which is 18%. There is a probability that it will be a "2R short-time jackpot"

  The jackpot type determination counter C2 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt), and the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is stored in the jackpot type determination counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the upper start winning opening 33A or the lower starting winning opening 33B, the value of the jackpot type determining counter C2 stored in the jackpot type determining counter buffer is the special variation holding area (first special holding area of the RAM 503. It is stored in the variable hold area or the second special variable hold area).

  Further, the reach selection counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 238), returns to 0 which is the lower limit value. In the present embodiment, after the reach occurs with respect to the symbol by the reach selection counter C3, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol and stops, so that “rear out-of-front reach” and the final stop symbol after the reach have occurred. Is to be selected by lottery for "reach other than out of front / rear" that stops at other than before and after the reach symbol, and "complete out" that does not cause reach. In the present embodiment, the reach determination table referred to when determining whether or not the value of the reach selection counter C3 is a value corresponding to the occurrence of the reach state and which reach is associated with the ROM 502. It is provided. A value of “0 to 238” is stored in the reach determination table, C3 = 0, 1 corresponds to the out-of-front / rear reach, C3 = 2 to 21 corresponds to the reach other than the out-of-front / rear, and C3 = 22 to 238 is complete. It is a structure that corresponds to a disconnection.

  The reach selection counter C3 is updated regularly (once in each timer interrupt in the present embodiment), and the value of the reach selection counter C3 is stored in the reach selection counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the upper start winning opening 33A or the lower starting winning opening 33B, the value of the reach selection counter C3 stored in the reach selection counter buffer is the special variation holding area (first special variation holding) of the RAM 503. Area or the second special variation hold area).

  Further, of the two fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, one fluctuation type counter CS1 is, for example, sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, reaches the upper limit value (that is, 198), and then becomes the lower limit value. The variation classification counter CS2 is configured to return to 0, and the other variation type counter CS2 is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 240, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 240), returns to the lower limit value of 0. Has become. In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as “first fluctuation type counter” and CS2 is also referred to as “second fluctuation type counter”. This is also shown in FIG.

  For example, in the 16R probability variation big hit time / variation pattern table (see FIG. 48) relating to the “normal effect mode” (when the “gaming state determination value Xj” described later is “1”), the first variation type counter CS1 is used. , The so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc., the reach type of the symbol and other rough variation modes are determined, and the second variation type counter CS2 determines more detailed variation modes such as the variation time. Therefore, by combining these fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, it is possible to easily realize diversification of fluctuation patterns. Of course, it is also possible to determine the variation mode only with the first variation type counter CS1.

  The normal reach is a reach pattern in which no special effect display other than the change of the symbols is displayed. Super reach is a reach pattern in which a character or the like is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 in addition to the symbols during the variable display of the symbols (after the reach state is established), thereby making the player have an expectation. Premium reach is an effect mode that can be derived only when a jackpot state occurs, and during variable display of symbols (after the reach state is established), a character or the like having a pattern different from that of super reach is displayed in addition to the symbols. This is a reach pattern that is performed in a mode and makes the player have a sense of expectation.

  The fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once each time a normal process described below is executed once, and are repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when the variation pattern is determined by the decorative symbol display device 42 when the variation of the symbol is started.

  The size and range of each counter are merely examples and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is preferable that the hit random number counter C1, the reach selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 all have different prime numbers and are not synchronized in any case.

  Further, the normal symbol random number counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 9, for example, and is configured as a loop counter that returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 9). The random number counter C4 is updated regularly (once in each of the timer interrupts in this embodiment), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired when the game ball passes through the through gate 34.

  Then, when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 to be won is acquired, after the variable display is performed for a predetermined time on the normal symbol display device 41, the symbol corresponding to the winning (“○” in this example) is stopped and displayed. Then, the electric accessory 37 of the lower start winning opening 33B is opened for a predetermined time.

  In the present embodiment, the value of the random number that is won in the "low support mode" is "0". On the other hand, in the “high support mode”, there are eight random number values of “0 to 7”. That is, in the "low support mode", the electric accessory 37 is opened with a probability of 1/10, and in the "high support mode", the electric accessory 37 is opened with a probability of 4/5. These winning probabilities correspond to the third winning probabilities.

  Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 is roughly classified into a main processing started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, in a cycle of 2 msec), and a stop signal to an NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is an NMI interrupt process that is activated by the input of, and here, for convenience of description, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the main process will be described.

  The NMI interrupt processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt, the state of main controller 261 at the time of power-off is stored in backup area 503a of RAM 503.

  That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main control device 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power cut occurrence information in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power cut occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing.

  The NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout control device 311, and the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. To start NMI interrupt processing. The contents are as described above.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process, and this process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 every 2 msec, for example. In the drawings, the timer interrupt processing by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is given a reference numeral starting with S3.

  In FIG. 11, first, in step S301, a process of reading various winning detection switches is executed. Here, the states of various winning detection switches (winning hole switch 221, count switch 223, starting winning switches 224A and 224B, through gate switch 225) connected to the main controller 261 are read and the state of the switches is determined. To save the detection information.

  In step S302, random number initial value updating processing is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the upper limit value (398 in this example).

  Further, in step S303, a random number update process is executed. Specifically, the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type determination counter C2, the reach selection counter C3, and the normal symbol random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the upper limit value, they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C3, C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 503.

  After that, in step S304, the start winning process associated with winning the start winning port 33A, 33B is executed, and in step S305, the through gate passing process associated with passing the game ball to the through gate 34 is executed. After that, the timer interrupt processing is once ended.

  Here, the start winning process of step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S304-1, it is determined based on the detection information of the second start winning combination switch 224B whether or not the game ball has won the lower starting winning opening 33B. When an affirmative decision is made in step S304-1, the value of the lower hold counter Nb that counts the number of variable display holdings triggered by the winning of the lower start winning opening 33B is the upper limit value (the present embodiment). In the form, it is determined whether it is less than “4”). When a negative determination is made in step S304-2, the process proceeds to step S304-9. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S304-2, the operation proceeds to step S304-3, and the lower hold counter Nb is incremented by 1.

  In the following step S304-4, the respective values of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type determination counter C2, and the reach selection counter C3 updated in the random number updating process of the above step S303 are set to the vacant holding area of the second special variation holding area. Store in the first area. After step S304-4, the process proceeds to step S304-5.

  In step S304-5, a second hit determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 newly stored in the second special variation holding area is a value corresponding to a big hit. Details of the second hit determination process in step S304-5 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S304-5-1, the value of the hit random number counter C1 newly stored in the second special variation suspension area matches the value “7” corresponding to the jackpot stored in the first jackpot win / loss determination table. It is determined whether to do.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S304-5-1, that is, if it is decided that a jackpot state will occur, then in step S304-5-2, the "jackpot winning flag" is turned on, and then this processing ends. The “big hit winning flag” is state determination information for determining the occurrence of the big hit state.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S304-5-1, it is determined in step S304-5-3 based on the value of the "lottery mode flag" whether or not the "high probability mode" is in effect. .

  The “lottery mode flag” is state determination information for determining whether the lottery mode is the “low probability mode” or the “high probability mode”. Further, in the present embodiment, the “lottery mode flag” is configured by 1 byte (8 bits), and as the flag value, “50” is set when the lottery mode is “low probability mode”, and “high” is set. In the case of "probability mode", "53" is set. Incidentally, the value "5" of the upper 4 bits in the "lottery mode flag" is uniformly added as a noise countermeasure, and is not particularly for determining the game state.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S304-5-3, that is, if the "high probability mode" is in effect, then in step S304-5-4 the hit random number counter C1 newly stored in the second special variation suspension area is stored. Of the values corresponding to the big hits stored in the second big hit win / loss determination table is any of “8 to 16” excluding the above “7”. In the determination process, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 matches each value corresponding to the big hit, one by one. Further, in the following, the process of determining whether a certain value (for example, a counter value) matches any one of a plurality of values is basically described in one block in the figure. In the actual processing, similarly to the above, it is determined whether or not a certain value matches any one of the plurality of values one by one.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S304-5-4, that is, if it is decided that a jackpot state will occur during the "high probability mode", then the "jackpot winning flag" is turned on in step S304-5-2. After that, this processing is ended as it is.

  If a negative determination is made in step S304-5-3 or step S304-5-4, this processing ends.

  Returning to FIG. 12, in step S304-5 following step S304-5, when it is determined in step S304-5 that the value of the hit random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the big hit, a second special variation is newly added. Based on the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 stored in the holding area, a second jackpot type determination process for determining the type of jackpot is performed.

  The second jackpot type determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the second jackpot type determination process, first, in step S304-6-1, it is determined whether or not the "jackpot winning flag" is set in the immediately preceding second jackpot determination process S304-5, and a negative determination is made. If so, this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when a positive determination is made, the second jackpot type determination table is taken into consideration and the type of jackpot is determined.

  Specifically, in step S304-6-2, the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 newly stored in the second special variation holding area is the value "0 to 39" corresponding to the "16R probability variation jackpot". It is determined whether or not either. Here, if an affirmative decision is made, then the flow shifts to step S304-6-3, the "16R certainty variation jackpot flag" is turned on, and this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S304-6-2, the process proceeds to step S304-6-4, and the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 newly stored in the second special variation suspension area is " It is determined whether or not the value is “40” corresponding to “2R probability variation big hit”. If an affirmative determination is made here, the flow shifts to step S304-6-5, the "2R certainty variation jackpot flag" is turned on, and this processing is ended.

  In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S304-6-4, the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 newly stored in the second special variation suspension area is the value "41" corresponding to "2R hour short jackpot". ~ 50 ", the" 2R hour / hour jackpot flag "is turned on in step S304-6-6, and this processing ends.

  The "16R certainty variation jackpot flag" is state determination information for determining the occurrence of "16R certainty variation jackpot", and the "2R certainty variation jackpot flag" is the state determination information for determining the occurrence of "2R certainty variation jackpot". This is information, and the “2R hour / hour / big hit flag” is state determination information for determining the occurrence of “2R hour / hour / big hit”.

  Returning to FIG. 12, in the following step S304-7, when it is determined in step S304-5 that the value of the hit random number counter C1 is not the value corresponding to the big hit, the value is newly stored in the second special variation suspension area. Based on the value of the reach selection counter C3, reach determination processing for determining the type of reach is performed.

  The reach determination processing in step S304-7 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S304-7 (15) -1, it is determined whether or not a winning flag (“big hit winning flag” or “small hit winning flag” described later) has been set in the jackpot determining process performed immediately before. To do. If an affirmative decision is made in step S304-7 (15) -1, that is, if a big hit state or a small hit state has occurred, this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the negative determination is made in step S304-7 (15) -1, that is, when the hit state does not occur, the reach determination table is taken into consideration in step S304-7 (15) -2 to newly add the second It is determined whether or not the value of the reach selection counter C3 stored in the special variation holding area matches either "0, 1" which is the value corresponding to "out-of-position reach". When an affirmative determination is made in step S304-7 (15) -2, in step S304-7 (15) -3, the "front / rear detachment flag" indicating the occurrence of front / rear detachment is turned on, and then this processing is performed. finish.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S304-7 (15) -2, in step S304-7 (15) -4, the reach determination table is taken into consideration, and the result is newly stored in the second special variation suspension area. It is determined whether or not the value of the reach selection counter C3 matches any one of the values "2 to 21" corresponding to "reach other than out of front and rear". When the affirmative determination is made in step S304-7 (15) -4, in step S304-7 (15) -5, the "other than front / rear outlier flag" indicating the occurrence of reach other than the front / rear outreach is turned on, This process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S304-7 (15) -4, that is, if the result is "complete disconnection", this processing is ended as it is.

  Returning to FIG. 12, in step S304-8 after the reach determination process S304-7, a holding control command setting process is performed. The hold control command is a command for notifying the sub-control device 262 in advance of various hold information (information used to determine the content of the variable display) held and stored in the second special variable hold area. is there. The hold control command set in this processing is output to the sub control device 262 in the next external output processing (see step S201). In the hold control command, for example, as hold information, information indicating the result of the second winning determination process or the second jackpot type determining process, information indicating that the variable display is triggered by the winning of the lower start winning port 33B, and the like. Is included.

  After the processing of step S304-8, or when a negative determination is made in step S304-1 or step S304-2, in step S304-9, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the upper start winning opening 33A. The determination is made based on the detection information of the first starting prize switch 224A. When a negative determination is made in step S304-9, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made, in step S304-10, the value of the upper suspension counter Na that counts the number of suspensions of variable display triggered by winning at the upper startup winning opening 33A is the upper limit value (in the present embodiment, in the present embodiment). It is determined whether it is less than “4”). When a negative determination is made in step S304-10, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S304-10, the operation proceeds to step S304-11, and the upper suspension counter Na is incremented by 1.

  In a succeeding step S304-12, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type determination counter C2, and the reach selection counter C3 is stored in the first reserved area of the first special variable reserved areas. After step S304-12, the process moves to step S304-13.

  In step S304-13, a first hit determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 newly stored in the first special variation holding area is a value corresponding to a big hit or a small hit. Here, details of the first hit determination process in step S304-13 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S304-13-1, the value of the hit random number counter C1 newly stored in the first special variation suspension area matches the value “7” corresponding to the jackpot stored in the first jackpot win / loss determination table. It is determined whether to do.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S304-13-1, that is, it is decided that a jackpot state will occur, the "jackpot winning flag" is turned on in step S304-13-2, and then this processing ends. In addition, the first special game state generation means is configured by the function of the main control device 261 that generates the jackpot state corresponding to the first special game state in step S304-5-2 or step S304-13-2.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S304-13-1, the process proceeds to step S304-13-3, and based on the value of the “lottery mode flag”, it is determined whether or not the “high probability mode” is being performed. judge.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S304-13-3, that is, if the "high probability mode" is being entered, then the flow of control proceeds to step S304-13-4, where the random number newly stored in the first special variation suspension area is newly stored. It is determined whether or not the value of the counter C1 is any of “8 to 16” excluding the above “7” among the values corresponding to the jackpots stored in the second jackpot hit determination table.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S304-13-4, that is, if it is decided that a jackpot state will occur during the "high probability mode", then the "jackpot winning flag" is turned on in step S304-13-2. After that, this processing is ended as it is.

  In addition, the determination process of step S304-5-1, step S304-5-4, step S304-13-1 and step S304-13-4 constitutes the first win / win lottery, and of the main control device 261 that executes this. The function forms the first lottery means.

  If a negative determination is made in step S304-13-3 or step S304-13-4, that is, if it is not a “big hit”, the process proceeds to step S304-13-5.

  In step S304-13-5, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 newly stored in the first special variation suspension area matches any of the values “101 to 110” corresponding to the small hit. .

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S304-13-5, that is, if it is decided that a small hit state will occur, then in step S304-13-6 the "small hit prize flag" is turned on and then this processing ends. To do. The "small hit prize flag" is state determination information for determining the occurrence of the small hit state.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S304-13-5, this processing is ended as it is. In the present embodiment, the determination process of step S304-13-5 constitutes the second winning / winning lottery, and the function of the main control device 261 for executing the second winning / winning lottery constitutes the second lottery means. Further, the second special game state generation means is configured by the function of the main control device 261 which generates the small hit state corresponding to the second special game state in step S304-13-6.

  Returning to FIG. 12, in the following step S304-14, when it is determined in step S304-13 that the value of the hit random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the big hit, the value is newly stored in the first special variation suspension area. Based on the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2, a first jackpot type determination process for determining the jackpot type.

  The first jackpot type determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the first jackpot type determination processing, first, in step S304-14-1, it is determined whether or not the “jackpot winning flag” is set in the first winning determination processing S304-13 performed immediately before, and the determination is negative. If it is determined, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made, the first jackpot type determination table is taken into consideration to determine the type of jackpot.

  Specifically, in step S304-14-2, the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 newly stored in the first special variation holding area is the value "0 to 19" corresponding to the "16R probability variation jackpot". It is determined whether or not either. Here, if an affirmative decision is made, then the flow shifts to step S304-14-3, the "16R certainty variation jackpot flag" is turned on, and this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S304-14-2, the process proceeds to step S304-14-4, and the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 newly stored in the first special variation suspension area is " It is determined whether or not the value is one of the values “20 to 39” corresponding to “8R probability variation jackpot”. Here, if an affirmative decision is made, then the flow shifts to step S304-14-5, the "8R certainty variation jackpot flag" is turned on, and this processing is terminated. The "8R probability variation big hit flag" is state determination information for determining the occurrence of "8R probability variation big hit".

  If a negative determination is made in step S304-14-4, the process proceeds to step S304-14-6. In step S304-14-6, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 newly stored in the first special variation suspension area is the value "40" corresponding to "2R certainty variation jackpot". . If an affirmative determination is made here, the flow shifts to step S304-14-7, the "2R certainty variation jackpot flag" is turned on, and this processing is ended. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S304-14-6, the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 newly stored in the first special variation suspension area is a value “2R normal jackpot” corresponding to “2R normal jackpot”. Since it is considered to be "41 to 50", the "2R normal jackpot flag" is turned on in step S304-14-8, and this processing ends. The “2R normal jackpot flag” is state determination information for determining the occurrence of “2R normal jackpot”.

  Returning to FIG. 12, in the following step S304-15, when it is determined in step S304-13 that the value of the hit random number counter C1 is not the value corresponding to the big hit or the small hit, a new first special variation holding area is newly set. Based on the stored value of the reach selection counter C3, reach determination processing for determining the type of reach is performed. The reach determination process of step S304-15 is the same as the reach determination process of step S304-7, and the information to be compared is stored in the reach selection counter C3 newly stored in the second special variation suspension area. The only difference is that it is not the value but the value of the reach selection counter C3 newly stored in the first special variation holding area. Therefore, detailed description of the reach determination processing in step S304-15 is omitted.

  In a succeeding step S304-16, a hold control command setting process is performed. After that, this processing ends. The setting process of the hold control command in step S304-16 is similar to the setting process of the hold control command in step S304-8, and the information regarding the variable display to be processed is displayed on the upper start winning opening 33A. The only difference is that it is based on entering a ball, so a detailed description is omitted for convenience.

  Returning to FIG. 11, the through-gate passage process of step S305 is performed subsequent to the start winning process of step S304. Next, the through-gate passage processing of step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S305-1, it is determined based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225 whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 34.

  When a negative determination is made in step S305-1, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S305-1, that is, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, in step S305-2, the variable display held by the normal symbol display device 41 is suspended. It is determined whether or not the value of the ordinary holding counter Nc that counts the number is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). When a negative determination is made here, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S305-2, that is, it is confirmed that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, and the value of the ordinary holding counter Nc is <4, the operation proceeds to step S305-3. , The normal holding counter Nc is incremented by 1.

  In a succeeding step S305-4, a random number related to the success or failure is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 updated by the random number updating process of step S303 is stored in the first reserved area of the normally variable reserved areas of the RAM 503. After that, the through gate passage processing is ended.

  Next, the flow of main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process is activated upon a reset when the power is turned on. In the drawings, the main processing by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is denoted by the reference numeral starting with S1.

  First, in step S101, an initialization process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, for example, in order to set a predetermined value to the stack pointer and wait for the sub-side control devices (sub-control device 262, payout control device 311 and the like) to become operable, for example, 1 Wait processing is executed for about a second. In the following step S102, RAM access is permitted.

  After that, the data backup processing is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed (ON), and if it is pressed, the process proceeds to step S111 to clear (delete) the backup data. To do.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed, it is determined in the following step S104 whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if it is not set, the backup data is not stored, and in this case also, the process proceeds to step S111. If the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S105, and in the subsequent step S106, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved when the power was turned off. That is, the effectiveness of backup is determined. If the RAM determination value calculated here does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is turned off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in this case also the process proceeds to step S111.

  The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of this RAM judgment value, it is possible to judge the validity of the backup by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly stored.

  In the process of step S111, an "initialization command" is transmitted in order to initialize the sub control device 262, the payout control device 311 and the like, which are the control devices on the sub side. The sub-control device 262 that has received the "initialization command" executes its own initialization process as described later, and the value of the "game state determination value Xj" corresponding to the "normal effect mode" that is the initial setting. "1" is stored in the game state storage area.

  The "game state determination value Xj" is information indicating the effect mode (effect mode) on the display section 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 and corresponds to the mode information. Further, the "game state determination value Xj" is set corresponding to each effect mode. In the present embodiment, the "gaming state determination value Xj" is set to "1" when the "normal effect mode" is set, and is set to "2" when the "time saving effect mode" is set, and When the "probability effect mode" is set, it is set to "3", and when the "probability change effect mode" is set, it is set to "4".

  In the “normal effect mode”, for example, a plurality of stages for the normal effect mode in which a background image is preset (in the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 59, a plurality of high-rise buildings are displayed in the “city center”). Stage ”, a“ park stage ”where trees and benches are displayed as shown in FIG. 60, and a“ suburb stage ”where multiple mountains are displayed as shown in FIG. 61). To be done. In the "normal effect mode", the upper symbol display area occupies approximately 1/3 above the display portion 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42, and the middle symbol display area occupies approximately 1/3 in the center of the display portion 42a. The symbol display area occupies about one-third of the lower portion of the display section 42a, and the symbol is configured to be displayed in a variable manner using almost the entire area of the display section 42a.

  In the present embodiment, the stage displayed in the “normal effect mode” is configured to be selected by the sub control device 262. Specifically, when the “game state determination value Xj” transmitted from the main control device 261 is “1”, the sub control device 262 arbitrarily selects and selects one of the above stages. The command relating to the stage is transmitted to the display control device 45. Then, the display control device 45 controls the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the received command, so that the display corresponding to the selected stage is performed on the decorative symbol display device 42. The stage displayed in the "normal production mode" may be selected by the main control device 261. In this case, for example, a different "game state determination value Xj" may be set for each stage (for example, in the "city center stage", "11" is set as the "game state determination value Xj", and "park stage" , "12" may be set as the "game state determination value Xj", and "13" may be set as the "game state determination value Xj" in the "suburb stage").

  The "time saving effect mode" is an effect mode mainly performed in the variable display after the "2R time saving big hit" is finished. In the “time saving effect mode”, the background image is a stage for a predetermined time saving effect mode different from the background image in the “normal effect mode” (in the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 81, the display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is displayed. In the section 42a, a state that the character is training is displayed, and characters such as "during training" are displayed as "training stage". Further, in the "time saving effect mode", the symbol display area is provided in a small size at a position deviated from the center of the display section 42a (lower right side of the display section 42a in the present embodiment).

  Further, in the "time saving production mode", information indicating the number of remaining fluctuations to which the high support mode is given (for example, a number indicating the remaining number of fluctuations or a meter whose scale is decreased by one with the end of fluctuation), Alternatively, information indicating the total number of fluctuations since the "time-saving effect mode" is set (for example, a number indicating the total number of fluctuations after the "time-saving effect mode") is also displayed on the display unit 42a. To be done. For example, in the present embodiment, the numerical value displayed in the area demarcated by the thick line on the display unit 42a (the numerical value between “remaining” and “day”) is the remaining fluctuation to which the “high support mode” is given. Shows the number of times.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 261 is configured to transmit the value of the “support number counter” to be described later to the sub control device 262, and the sub control device 262 normally receives the “support number counter”. By controlling the display control device 45 based on the value of the “count counter”, the remaining number of fluctuations is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. However, in the present embodiment, as will be described later in detail, when a “small hit” occurs in the “probability variation effect mode”, the effect mode is set to the “time saving effect mode”. In the control device 262, the number of times the “variation pattern command” is received (that is, the number of times of variation) after the “time saving effect mode” is set is measured, and information corresponding to the remaining number of variations is calculated based on the number of times of measurement. can get. Then, based on this information, the sub-control device 262 controls the display control device 45, so that dummy information corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. That is, when a "small hit" occurs in the "probabilistic effect production mode", a value irrelevant to the actual value of the "support frequency counter" is displayed as the remaining variation frequency.

  The “support counter” is a means for measuring the duration of the “high support mode” (how many times the variable display is repeated). In the process after the jackpot is over, the value corresponding to each jackpot is the counter value. Is set as. Further, the information indicating the remaining number of fluctuations and the like does not necessarily have to be displayed, and can be appropriately omitted.

  The "latent probability effect mode" is an effect mode mainly performed in the variable display after the "2R probability variation big hit" or "small hit" is finished. In the "latent accuracy effect mode", the background image has a predetermined latent accuracy effect mode stage different from the background images in the "normal effect mode" and the "time saving effect mode" (in the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 76, On the display section 42a of the decorative pattern display device 42, a state in which a car carrying a character is running is displayed, and characters such as "in business" are displayed as "sales stage". Further, in the "latent probability effect mode", as in the "normal effect mode", the symbols are variably displayed using almost the entire area of the display section 42a. Further, as described above, the shift to the "latent probability effect mode" is performed not only at the end of the "2R certainty variation jackpot" but also after the "small hit" or "2R normal jackpot". Therefore, it is difficult for the player to know whether the lottery mode is the “high probability mode” or the “low probability mode”.

  The "probability variation effect mode" is an effect mode performed in the variable display after the "8R probability variation jackpot" or "16R probability variation jackpot" is finished. In the "probability variation effect mode", the background image has a predetermined probability variation effect mode stage different from the background images in the "normal effect mode", the "time saving effect mode" and the "latent probability effect mode" (in the present embodiment, for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, a predetermined character is displayed on the display unit 42a, and a "break stage" is displayed, which clearly indicates that "high probability mode" such as "during break"). . Incidentally, in the “probability change effect mode”, the symbol display area is provided in a small size at a position deviated from the center of the display section 42a, similarly to the “time saving effect mode”.

  It should be noted that each effect mode is not limited to the above-described aspect, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, in each effect mode, the same stage may be displayed, but the hue of the background image may be different in each effect mode (for example, in the "normal effect mode", the background image is colored in full color). As a mode, the background image has a greenish color scheme in the "time saving production mode", the background image has a low saturation (close to black and white) monotone color scheme in the "latent probability production mode", and the background image has a "probability variation production mode". It may be a reddish color scheme). Further, in the present embodiment, the mode of the symbols that are variably displayed is configured to be the same in each effect mode, but in a specific effect mode, a pattern that is different from the symbols in the other effect modes May be variably displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 9, after the process of step S111, the process proceeds to the RAM initialization process (step S112 and the like).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on, the process proceeds to the RAM initialization process (step S112 etc.). Also, when the power-off occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process similarly proceeds to the initialization processing of the RAM 503 (step S112 or the like). In step S112, the used area of RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in the following step S113, the initial value of RAM 503 is set. After that, interrupt permission is set in step S114, and the routine proceeds to normal processing described later.

  On the other hand, when the RAM deletion switch 323 is not pressed (step S103: NO), the power-off occurrence information is set and the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( Under the conditions of S104: YES and S106: YES, the process at power recovery (the process at power recovery) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before power-off is restored, and in step S108, power-off occurrence information is cleared.

  In a succeeding step S109, a "return command" (for example, the "payout return command") for returning the sub control device 262, which is the control device on the sub side, the payout control device 311 and the like to the game state when the power is cut off is transmitted. The "return command" transmitted to the sub control device 262 includes the "game state determination value Xj" that is information indicating the effect mode when the power is cut off. The sub-control device 262, based on the "return command" including the "game state determination value Xj", the effect mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 when the power is turned off (in the present embodiment, "normal effect mode", "time saving effect"). Mode ”,“ substantial probability effect mode ”or“ probability change effect mode ”).

  In step S110, the used register is restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. After that, interrupt permission is set in step S114, and the process proceeds to normal processing.

  Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, the processing of steps S201 to S210 is executed as a regular processing of a 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating processing of steps S211 and S212 is executed in the remaining time. In the drawings, the normal processing by the main control device 261 is given a reference numeral starting with S2.

  First, in step S201, a control signal based on the control contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R and the electric accessory 37 updated in the previous process is transmitted to each device, and output data such as a command is output to each sub device. It executes external output processing such as transmission to the control device. Some more specific examples will be given below.

  For example, based on the detection information of the above-mentioned various detection switches, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won a prize hole such as the general prize hole 31, and if there is a prize, the prize balls corresponding to the number corresponding to the prize ball. The payout command is transmitted to the payout control device 311.

  Further, a command including the “lottery mode flag” is output to the sub control device 262.

  If a command for blinking the error display lamp 104 is set, the command is output to the sub control device 262.

  Further, in the external output processing, information for grasping the game state is externally output to the hall computer of the game hall by taking into consideration various information such as the “lottery mode flag” and the “big hit flag” described later. Furthermore, the output of error information and the like to the hall computer is also executed in this output processing. For example, when a winning error is detected, an ON signal (pulse signal) is output to the hall computer in the game hall through a predetermined terminal of the external relay terminal board 240, and when there is no winning error, it is turned OFF. The signal is output.

  In addition, when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the symbols in a variable manner, it transmits a “variable pattern command”, a “symbol command”, an “ending command” described later, a “round opening command” described later, and the like to the sub-control device 262. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262, to which the “variation pattern command”, the “design command”, the “ending command”, the “round opening command”, etc., is input, the variation of the decorative design display device 42 based on the various commands. The mode is determined, and the display control device 45 is instructed to display the variable mode on the decorative pattern display device 42 (variable display). The function of executing the external output process (S201) in the main controller 261 constitutes the variation pattern command output means.

  In step S202, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like the other counters, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the upper limit values (198 and 240 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0 respectively. To do. Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  In a succeeding step S203, the prize ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S204, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

  Then, in step S205, the first display control process is executed. In this process, the control contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R are set as to what kind of control is to be performed in the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, and the jackpot determination and the symbols in the decorative symbol display device 42 are performed. The variation pattern is set. Here, the first display control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S205-1, various types of hitting flags (“big hitting medium flag” and “small hitting medium flag”) described below are referred to, and it is currently hitting (in big hitting state or small hitting state). Or not.

  The “big hit flag” is state determination information for determining whether or not the big hit state is in progress. In the present embodiment, the “big hit flag” is turned on when the big hit state is set (“1” is set as a flag value), and the “big hit flag” is turned off when the big hit state is not set ( "0" is set as the flag value).

  The "small hitting flag" is state determination information for determining whether or not the small hitting state is in progress. In the present embodiment, similar to the big hit medium flag, the "small hit medium flag" is turned on (the flag value is set to "1") in the small hit state, and is not in the small hit state. The “small hitting flag” is turned off (“0” is set as the flag value).

  The hit state (large hit state and small hit state) includes the middle of the hit state and a predetermined time after the end of the hit state. The predetermined time after the end of the hit state here is the time after the end of the hit state until the normal game (variable display on the special display devices 43L and 43R) is started, and this time zone is the decorative symbol display device. At 42, the end of the hit state, various game states given after the hit, and displays (ending effects) showing various modes are performed. In addition, the period from when the variable display device 32 is opened after the variable display is stopped and displayed in the special display devices 43L and 43R and the decorative pattern display device 42 in a manner corresponding to the hit [generally this time The band also includes a display (opening effect) indicating the start of the hit state on the decorative pattern display device 42].

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S205-1, that is, if the hit state is in effect, then this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S205-1, in step S205-2, the first or second special display device 43L, 43R (decorative design) is checked by looking at the setting status of the "first displaying flag". It is determined whether or not the variable display is being performed on the display device 42). Specifically, when the "first display flag" is set (in the on state), it is considered to be in the variable display, and when the "first display flag" is released (in the off state) Is considered to be in the stop display, which is a state in which the variable display is stopped.

  The "first display flag" is state determination information for determining whether or not the variable display is being performed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R. In the present embodiment, when the variable display is being performed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, the “first display flag” is turned on (“1” is set as the flag value), and When the variable display is not being performed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, the “first display flag” is turned off (“0” is set as the flag value). Further, the “first displaying flag” is turned on when starting the variable display of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R (see steps S205-7 and S205-7-27), and the first flag is displayed. When the variable display of the second special display devices 43L and 43R is stopped and displayed (see step S205-14), it is turned off.

  If a negative determination is made in step S205-2, that is, if it is not in the hit state and the variable display is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S205-3, and the variable display is triggered by the winning of the lower start winning port 33B (the first display). It is determined whether or not the value of the lower hold counter Nb that counts the number of holdings (2 variable display) is larger than 0.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S205-3, that is, if any one of the second variable displays is stored in suspension, then 1 is subtracted from the lower suspension counter Nb in step S205-4. In the present embodiment, when the second variable display is held and stored (that is, when the determination in step S205-3 is affirmative), regardless of whether or not the first variable display is held and stored, The process (S205-4 to S205-6) related to the two-variation display is executed. That is, even if the first variable display is held and stored earlier than the second variable display, the process related to the second variable display is preferentially consumed (the first variable display is postponed). ) Has been configured.

  In the following step S205-5, a process of shifting the data stored in the second special variation suspension area is executed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the second special variation holding area to the execution area side, and the holding first area → the execution area, the holding second The data in each area is shifted in the order of area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area. After step S205-5, in step S205-6, the process of turning on / off the second holding lamp 46b and the process of causing the variation specifying lamp 40 to emit red light are performed, and then the process proceeds to step S205-7.

  In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S205-3, that is, when no second variation display is retained and stored, in step S205-8, variation that is triggered by winning at the upper start winning port 33A. It is determined whether or not the upper hold counter Na that counts the number of held display (first variable display) is greater than zero. When a negative determination is made in step S205-8, this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S205-8, then 1 is subtracted from the upper suspension counter Na in step S205-9. In the following step S205-10, a process of shifting the data stored in the first special variation suspension area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the first special variation holding area to the execution area side, and the holding first area → the execution area, the holding second The data in each area is shifted in the order of area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area. After step S205-10, in step S205-11, the process of turning on / off the first holding lamp 46a and the process of causing the variation specifying lamp 40 to emit blue light are performed, and then the process proceeds to step S205-7. In the present embodiment, the execution area of the special variation suspension area is one, and the data stored in the first special variation suspension area and the second special variation suspension area are displayed when performing the variation display based on the data. Then, it will be shifted to a common execution area.

  In step S205-7, variable display setting processing is performed. In the variable display setting process, a "variation pattern command" and a "symbol command" are set. Therefore, first, the “variation pattern command” and the “symbol command” will be described before the description of the variation display setting process.

  The “fluctuation pattern command” is a command that is controlled by the sub-control device 262 and is used to determine the appearance aspect of the decorative symbol display device 42, such as the appearance of the symbol or the variation aspect, in the variation pattern table stored in the ROM 502. It is set based on. More specifically, in the present embodiment, as the variation pattern table, as shown in FIGS. 49 (a) to (h), a variation pattern table corresponding to “16R probability variation jackpot” and a variation pattern corresponding to “8R probability variation jackpot”. Table, fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "2R probability variable big hit", fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "2R short-time big hit", fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "2R normal big hit" or "small hit", "front-back deviation reach" The variation pattern table corresponding to "reach other than front and rear deviation" and the variation pattern table corresponding to "complete deviation" are respectively in the production mode (values "1" to "4" of "game state determination value Xj"). That is, "normal production mode", "time saving production mode", "latent probability production mode" and "probable variation production" Provided with a plurality, depending on the over-de "). Note that, in FIG. 49, for convenience of illustration, a variation pattern table corresponding to “2R certainty variation jackpot”, a variation pattern table corresponding to “2R hour short jackpot”, and “2R normal jackpot” or “small hit” Although the fluctuation pattern table is described separately, in reality, the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the “2R certainty variation jackpot” when the “gaming state determination value Xj” is “1” or “3” and the “2R normal The variation pattern table corresponding to "big hit" or "small hit" is common. Further, when the "gaming state determination value Xj" is "2" or "4", a variation pattern table corresponding to "2R short-time jackpot" and a variation pattern corresponding to "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit" It is common with the table.

  Then, step S205-7-4, step S205-7-7, step S205-7-10, step S205-7-13, step S205-7-18, step S205-7-22, step S205-7 described later. When the fluctuation pattern is determined at -25, the processing of selecting the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the current effect mode (the value of the "game state determination value Xj") from the plurality of table groups is performed. Then, the variation pattern is determined based on the selected variation pattern table, and the corresponding "variation pattern command" is set. The ROM 502 that stores the fluctuation pattern table constitutes the fluctuation pattern storage means in this embodiment.

  The “fluctuation pattern command” in the present embodiment has a 2-byte structure, and the upper 4 bits of the upper byte are composed of information specifying the effect mode. That is, in the present embodiment, the value of the "game state determination value Xj" is set as it is. In addition, the lower 4 bits of the upper byte are configured by information that identifies the winning type (type of big hit or small hit), and the 8 bits of the lower byte identify the variation pattern (variation time, reach type, etc.). It is composed by.

  The sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these “variation pattern commands” and the variation mode (variation pattern) of the symbols in a table. When the “variation pattern command” is received, the “variation pattern command” is stored. A variation pattern (effect pattern) corresponding to “” can be executed on the decorative pattern display device 42.

  The "variation pattern command" is not limited to the above configuration. For example, in order to reduce the processing load on the main controller 261, the "variation pattern command" has a 1-byte configuration, and the upper 4 bits are configured by information (value of "gaming state determination value Xj") for specifying the effect mode. However, the lower 4 bits may be configured by the information specifying the type or the like. In this case, the sub-control device 262 is provided with a table in which the relationship of the variation patterns of a plurality of symbols corresponding to one "variation pattern command" is stored, and the table is taken into consideration to The control device 262 may be configured to select and determine a variation pattern (variation time, reach type, etc.).

  Next, the "design command" will be described. The “symbol command” is a command for causing the sub control device 262 to determine a stop symbol. In the present embodiment, a combination of odd big jackpot symbols, a combination of even jackpot designs, a combination of front and back deviating symbols, a combination of symbols other than front and back deviating, a combination of complete deviating symbols, a special symbol in the middle symbol display area The combination of symbols to be displayed (that is, when the "2R probability variable jackpot" occurs, or when the "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit" occurs in a specific effect mode, , Sometimes referred to as “combination of special symbols.” Also, in the figure, it may be simply referred to as “special symbol”), when a combination of prescribed symbols (that is, “2R hour / hour jackpot” occurs, Or, seven categories of "combination of symbols when" 2R normal big hit "or" small hit "occur in a specific effect mode) are designated. These divisions are indicated by, for example, "B1", "B2", "B3", "B4", "B5", "B6", "B7", and one of them is set as a "design command". To be done. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these "symbol commands" and the stop symbols in a table. Then, the sub-control device 262 displays the stop symbol corresponding to the “symbol command” on the decorative symbol display device 42.

  The combination of odd big jackpots is a combination of symbols composed of the numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9, and "B1" is in the "design command" corresponding to the combination of odd big jackpots. Is set. Then, the sub-control device 262, when "B1" indicating an odd big hit symbol is set in the "symbol command", among the combinations of symbols composed of the numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, 9 One of them is decided as a stop symbol.

  The combination of even big jackpots is a combination of symbols consisting of the numbers 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8, and "B2" is in the "design command" corresponding to the combination of even jackpots. Is set. Then, the sub-control device 262, when "B2" indicating an even big hit symbol is set in the "symbol command", among the combinations of symbols composed of the numbers 0, 2, 4, 6, 8 One of them is decided as a stop symbol.

  The combination of the front and rear deviating symbols corresponds to the "rear and front deviating reach" in which the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol after the reach occurs, and corresponds to the combination of the front and rear deviating symbols. "B3" is set in the "design command".

  The combination of the symbols other than the front and rear is corresponding to the "reach other than the front and rear detachment" in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and rear of the reach symbol after the reach occurs. "B4" is set in the "design command".

  The combination of complete removal symbols corresponds to "complete removal" in which reach does not occur, and "B5" is set in the "design command" corresponding to the combination of complete removal symbols.

  In addition, a special symbol combination displayed in the middle symbol display area (combination of special symbols) is a special stop symbol (a symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area) after a reach occurs. The symbols are stopped and displayed. The combination of the special symbols is, as shown in FIG. 45 and FIG. 50, when the “2R probability variable jackpot” and the “game state determination value Xj” are “1” or “3” (that is, “normal effect”). It corresponds to "2R normal big hit" and "small hit" (in "mode" or "latent accuracy effect mode"), and "B6" is set to this symbol command.

  After the reach has occurred, the combination of the prescribed symbols (note that this reach is displayed as an effect, and the symbols displayed at the time of reach and the final stop symbol are irrelevant), each symbol display area A predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in (in this example, the symbols stopped and displayed in each symbol display area are “2”, “4”, and “6” in order from the top as described above). . As shown in FIGS. 45 and 50, the combination of the prescribed symbols is “2R hour / hour jackpot”, and when the “game state determination value Xj” is “2” or “4” (that is, “time saving effect”). It corresponds to "2R normal big hit" and "small hit" (in "mode" or "probability variation effect mode"), and "B7" is set to this symbol command.

  Incidentally, as will be described in detail later, when "B3" to "B5" are set in the "symbol command", the sub control device 262 sets the combination of symbols stored in the corresponding counter buffer of the RAM 553. Determined as a stop symbol.

  Specifically, when "B3" indicating the combination of the front and rear deviation symbols is set to the "symbol command", the sub control device 262 which has received the "symbol command" stores it in the front and rear deviation reach buffer of the RAM 553. The combination of the symbols corresponding to the front / rear out-of-position reach is determined as the stop symbol.

  Further, when "B4" indicating a combination of symbols other than front and rear is set to the "symbol command", the sub-control device 262 which has received the "symbol command" is stored in the reach symbol buffer of the RAM 553 other than front and rear. A combination of symbols corresponding to the reach other than the front and rear deviations is determined as the stop symbol.

  Furthermore, when "B5" indicating a combination of complete removal symbols is set to the "design command", the sub control device 262 which has received the "design command" is completely stored in the complete removal symbol buffer of the RAM 553. A combination of symbols corresponding to the disengagement is determined as a stop symbol.

  Further, when "B6" is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 determines a combination of symbols in which a special symbol is displayed in the middle symbol display area as a stop symbol. Incidentally, the sub-control device 262, as a symbol in the upper symbol display area, and as a symbol in the lower symbol display area, the front / rear out-reach symbol buffer, or the symbol in the upper symbol display area stored in the reach symbol buffer other than the detachment, And, the symbols in the lower symbol display area are displayed.

  Further, when "B7" is set in the "symbol command", the sub-control device 262 selects the prescribed symbol combination as the symbol combination.

  Next, details of the variable display setting process in step S205-7 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S205-7-1, it is determined whether or not the "small hit prize flag" is on. When an affirmative determination is made in step S205-7-1, that is, when it is determined that the variable display corresponds to "small hit", the process proceeds to step S205-7-16. On the other hand, if the negative determination is made in step S205-7-1, that is, if it is determined that the variable display does not correspond to the "small hit", the process proceeds to step S205-7-2.

  In step S205-7-2, it is determined whether or not the "big hit winning flag" is on. When an affirmative determination is made in step S205-7-2, that is, when it is determined that the variable display corresponds to the “big hit”, the process proceeds to step S205-7-3. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S205-7-2, that is, if it is determined that the variable display does not correspond to "big hit" or "small hit", that is, if it is out. Shifts to step S205-7-17.

  In step S205-7-3, it is determined whether or not the variable display corresponds to the "16R certainty variation jackpot" by determining whether the "16R certainty variation jackpot flag" is on.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S205-7-3, that is, if the variable display corresponds to the "16R probability variation jackpot", then in step S205-7-4 it corresponds to the "16R probability variation jackpot". The fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the fluctuation pattern table, and is set in the "variation pattern command". Subsequently, in step S205-7-5, a "design command" is set. In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol (in the present embodiment, whether it is an odd number symbol or an even number symbol) is determined with reference to the symbol table corresponding to “16R probability variation jackpot” stored in the ROM 502, and the corresponding “ Design command "(in the present embodiment," B1 "or" B2 ") is set. Then, it transfers to step S205-7-27.

  When a negative determination is made in step S205-7-3, the flow proceeds to step S205-7-6, and it is determined whether or not the "8R certainty variation jackpot flag" is ON, so that the variation display is "8R certainty variation." It is determined whether or not it corresponds to "big hit".

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S205-7-6, that is, if the fluctuation display corresponds to the "8R probability variation jackpot", then in step S205-7-7 it corresponds to the "8R probability variation jackpot". The fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the fluctuation pattern table to be set, and is set in the “variation pattern command”. Then, in step S205-7-8, a "design command" is set. In the present embodiment, the jackpot pattern (whether it is an odd number symbol or an even number symbol in the present embodiment) stored in the ROM 502 is taken into consideration in consideration of the symbol table corresponding to “8R probability variation jackpot”, and the corresponding “ Design command "(in the present embodiment," B1 "or" B2 ") is set. Then, it transfers to step S205-7-27.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the "symbol command" set at the time of "16R certainty variation jackpot" or "8R certainty variation jackpot" is not clearly distinguished by the jackpot type, but is common. Can be set. That is, if "16R probability variation jackpot", "odd symbol" is stopped and displayed, if "8R probability variation jackpot", "even symbol" is stopped and displayed, and the relationship between the stop symbol and jackpot type is clear. Is not associated with. In other words, in the present embodiment, the number of rounds awarded during the big hit cannot be determined depending on the type of the symbol stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42.

  In addition, according to each of the above-mentioned symbol tables, for example, if the "16R probability variation jackpot" is easily stopped and displayed as "odd number symbol", the appearance rate of the symbol may be set to be different depending on each jackpot type. Further, for example, at the time of "16R certainty variation jackpot" or "8R certainty variation jackpot", the stop symbol may be selected based on one symbol table regardless of the jackpot type.

  When a negative determination is made in step S205-7-6, the flow proceeds to step S205-7-9, and it is determined whether or not the "2R certainty variation jackpot flag" is ON, so that the variation display is "2R certainty variation. It is determined whether or not it corresponds to "big hit".

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S205-7-9, that is, when the variable display corresponds to the "2R certainty variation jackpot", the process proceeds to step S205-7-10, and the "2R certainty variation jackpot" is handled. The fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the fluctuation pattern table to be set, and is set in the “variation pattern command”. After that, in step S205-7-11, a "symbol command" (in this embodiment, "B6") that causes a combination of special symbols to be displayed is set, and the process proceeds to step S205-7-27. To do.

  When a negative determination is made in step S205-7-9, the flow proceeds to step S205-7-12, and it is determined whether or not the "2R hour / hour jackpot flag" is ON, whereby the variable display indicates "2R hour / hour. It is determined whether or not it corresponds to "big hit". When an affirmative determination is made in step S205-7-12, that is, when the variable display corresponds to "2R hour / hour jackpot", the process proceeds to step S205-7-13, and "2R hour / hour jackpot" is handled. The fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the fluctuation pattern table to be set, and is set in the “variation pattern command”. After that, in step S205-7-14, the "symbol command" ("B7" in the present embodiment) that causes the combination of the regulated symbols to be displayed is set, and the process proceeds to step S205-7-27. To do.

  When a negative determination is made in step S205-7-12, the flow proceeds to step S205-7-15, and it is determined whether or not the "2R normal jackpot flag" is on, so that the variable display indicates "2R. It is determined whether or not it corresponds to "normal jackpot". When an affirmative determination is made in step S205-7-15, that is, when the variable display corresponds to "2R normal jackpot", an affirmative determination is made in step S205-7-1 (the variable display is Similar to the case of “small hit”), the process proceeds to step S205-7-16. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S205-7-15, that is, even though the “big hit winning flag” is turned on, the “16 probability variation jackpot flag”, the “8R probability variation jackpot flag”, etc. If none of the jackpot flags of No is turned on, this processing is ended as it is.

  In step S205-7-16, it is determined whether or not the "gaming state determination value Xj" is "1" or "3", that is, whether or not the effect mode is the "normal effect mode" or the "latent probability effect mode". To determine. When the "game state determination value Xj" is "1" or "3" (S205-7-16: YES), the process proceeds to step S205-7-10, and "2R normal big hit" or "small hit". The variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern table corresponding to, and set in the "variation pattern command". After that, in step S205-7-11, a "symbol command" (in this embodiment, "B6") that causes a combination of special symbols to be displayed is set, and the process proceeds to step S205-7-27. To do. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the “game state determination value Xj” is “1” or “3”, when the “2R certainty variation jackpot”, “2R normal jackpot” or “small hit” occurs The "variation pattern command" is set from the common variation pattern table, and the same "symbol command" is set. Therefore, in the "normal effect mode" or the "latent probability effect mode", when "2R probability variation big hit", "2R normal big hit" or "small hit" occurs, depending on the variation pattern of the symbol or the stop symbol, "2R It is not possible to determine whether it is a "probable variation jackpot", a "2R normal jackpot", or a "small hit". When "big hit" occurs, the effect after the symbols stop (big hit medium effect, etc.) is different from the effect when "2R normal big hit" or "small hit" occurs, so the hit type is determined based on this effect. It is possible to determine].

  On the other hand, if the negative determination is made in step S205-7-16 (that is, the "gaming state determination value Xj" is "2" or "4"), the process proceeds to step S205-7-13. The variation pattern is determined with reference to the variation pattern table corresponding to "2R normal big hit" or "small hit", and is set in the "variation pattern command". After that, in step S205-7-14, the "symbol command" ("B7" in the present embodiment) that causes the combination of the regulated symbols to be displayed is set, and the process proceeds to step S205-7-27. To do. In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the “gaming state determination value Xj” is “2” or “4”, “2R hour / hour jackpot”, “2R normal jackpot” or “small hit” occurs. At this time, the "variation pattern command" is set from the common variation pattern table, and the same "symbol command" is set. Therefore, in the "time saving production mode" or the "probability variation production mode", when "2R time reduction jackpot", "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit" occurs, the variation type of the symbol or the stop symbol causes It is so hard to distinguish.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S205-7-2, that is, when the "displacement" occurs, it is determined in step S205-7-17 whether or not the "front and rear detachment flag" is turned on. .

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S205-7-17, that is, if the variation display corresponds to "out-of-front / rear reach", then in step S205-7-18 the variation corresponding to "out-of-front / rear reach". The fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the pattern table and set in the "variation pattern command". Then, in step S205-7-19, the "front-back deviation flag" is turned off. Further, in step S205-7-20, a "symbol command" ("B3" in the present embodiment) corresponding to the front / back deviation symbol is set, and then the process proceeds to step S205-7-27.

  When a negative determination is made in step 205-7-17, it is determined in step S205-7-21 whether or not the "flag other than front / rear deviation" is on. If an affirmative decision is made in step S205-7-21, that is, if the variable display corresponds to "reach other than front / rear deviation", then in step S205-7-22 it becomes "reach other than front / rear deviation". The fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the corresponding fluctuation pattern table, and is set in the "variation pattern command". Succeedingly, in a step S205-7-23, the "flag other than front and rear deviation" is turned off. Furthermore, in step S205-7-24, a symbol command (“B4” in this embodiment) corresponding to the symbol other than the front / rear deviation is set, and then the process proceeds to step S205-7-27.

  If a negative determination is made in step S205-7-21, that is, if the variable display corresponds to "complete deviation", fluctuation corresponding to "complete deviation" in step S205-7-25. The fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the pattern table and set in the "variation pattern command". Then, in step S205-7-26, the "symbol command" ("B5" in the present embodiment) corresponding to the completely removed symbol is set. Then, it transfers to step S205-7-27.

  The "fluctuation pattern command" and "symbol command" set as described above are output in the above-described external output processing (step S201). Then, the sub-control device 262 to which these commands have been input determines the variation mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the command, and displays the variation mode on the decorative symbol display device 42 (variable display). To the display control device 45.

  By the way, in step S205-7-27, a start setting process is performed to indicate that the condition for performing variable display on the special display devices 43L and 43R is satisfied. In the start setting process, the "first display flag" is turned on and the "first display timer" setting process is performed.

  The "first display timer" is a means for measuring the variation time (remaining time of variation display) in the special display devices 43L and 43R, and is taken into consideration when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of variation display. To be done.

  In the present embodiment, the time (variation display time of the special display devices 43L and 43R) set in the “first display timer” is a value corresponding to the variation pattern of the symbols selected by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2. To be done. When a control signal to start the variable display is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the next external output process (step S201) of the normal process based on the setting of the "first display timer" Then, the variable display is started on the special display devices 43L and 43R.

  Returning to FIG. 19, when an affirmative determination is made in step S205-2, that is, when the variable display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S205-12, and the first display timer subtraction process is performed. In this first display timer subtraction processing, the value of the "first display timer" is subtracted by one. As described above, since the normal processing including the first display control processing in step S205 is performed every 4 msec, when the “first display flag” is on, the “first display timer” is set every 4 msec. The value will be decreased by one. Therefore, for example, when the fluctuation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), "2500" is set for the "first display timer" in step S205-7-27.

  Subsequently, in step S205-13, it is determined whether or not a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, by taking the value of the "first display timer" after the subtraction into consideration. When the predetermined variation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the first display timer becomes "0", an affirmative determination is made in step S205-13.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S205-13, that is, when the value of the "first display timer" is greater than 0, the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R is performed in step S205-17. The switching display setting for continuing the operation is performed, and this processing ends. In addition, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for switching display is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Thereby, the switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is realized at the timing of the first display control process, that is, every 4 msec.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S205-13, the "first display flag" is canceled (turned off) in step S205-14, and stop display is carried out on the special display devices 43L, 43R in step S205-15. Set the stop display to perform. In addition, based on the setting content of the stop display setting, a control signal for performing the stop display is output to the special display devices 43L and 42R in the external output processing in the next normal processing. For example, in the case of "16R probability variation big hit", "9-" is stopped and displayed (for example, lit only for a few seconds).

  After the stop display setting is performed in step S205-15, the variation end setting process is performed in step S205-16, and the present process ends. Next, the fluctuation end time setting process in step S205-16 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S205-16-1, the "big hit winning flag" is taken into consideration and it is determined whether or not the stop display corresponds to "big hit". Here, when it corresponds to "big hit", it moves to step S205-16-2 and performs big hit setting processing. Then, after the end of step S205-16-2, the setting processing at the end of fluctuation ends. In the jackpot setting process, the process for causing the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform the "opening effect" from the stop of the variable display to the start of the prize state, the opening time of the variable winning device 32, and the "opening". Subsequent to "drafting", processing necessary for starting the prize state is performed. Specifically, in the big hit setting process, a "big hit medium flag", a "remaining open number counter", a "specified number K1", a "open wait timer", and an "opening command" are set. Next, the jackpot setting process in step S205-16-2 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S205-16-2-1, it is determined whether or not the "16R probability variation jackpot flag" is on. Here, when the "16R probability variation jackpot flag" is ON (S205-16-2-1: YES), the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-2, and the open / close pattern control table is taken into consideration to select " "15" is set as an initial value in the "remaining open counter".

  In the opening / closing pattern control table, as shown in FIG. 51, "remaining open number counter" corresponding to the number of occurrences of the special prize state in each winning state (the maximum number of occurrences of the prize state in the case of a small hit) The initial value, the maximum value of the opening time of the open / close plate 32b in each prize state (each round), the interval time between each prize state, and the like are set in advance.

  The “remaining open number counter” is state determination information for determining the number of remaining special prize states executed during the big hit state or the small hit state, that is, the number of remaining open / close processes of the variable winning device 32. . The initial value of the "remaining open number counter" is 1 less than the number of special prize states in the winning state (the maximum number of times in the case of a small hit) even when the "remaining open number counter" is 0. This is because the variable winning device 32 is opened.

  After step S205-16-2-2, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-3, and with reference to the opening / closing pattern control table, one opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 32b in the jackpot state (one prize state) The specified number K1 that is the maximum expected number of winnings to the variable winning device 32 is set. As described above, the specified number K1 is predetermined for each opening type such as "long opening" or "short opening" (operation mode of the opening / closing plate 32b related to one opening / closing operation). In step S205-16-2-3, "10" corresponding to "long open" is set as the specified number K1.

  After setting the specified number K1, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-4, the opening command table (see FIG. 52) is taken into consideration, and the "opening command" setting process corresponding to the "16R probability variation jackpot" is performed.

  In the opening command table, the "game state determination value Xj" that is currently set and the "opening command" that is set when a win occurs in the "lottery mode" are stored for each type of win. There is. Then, the setting process of the "opening command" is based on the "gaming state determination value Xj", the "lottery mode", various "big hit flags" and "small win prize flags", and the corresponding "opening command" from the opening command table. It is made by selecting "."

  In addition, the "opening command" is output to the sub-control device 262 in order to perform the "opening effect" that is performed from the stop of the variable display to the start of the prize state on the display section 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42. It is what is done. The sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between the “opening command” and the opening effect in a table. When the sub-control device 262 receives the “opening command”, the sub-control device 262 performs display control based on the received “opening command”. The device 45 is controlled, and as a result, the opening effect corresponding to the received "opening command" is executed by the decorative symbol display device 42.

  In the "opening effect", for example, an effect indicating the type of the special prize state started after the "opening effect" or an act of the player launching a game ball toward the right side area of the variable display device unit 35 (" An effect that recommends "right-handed", an effect corresponding to the case where the effect mode shifts to the "latent accuracy effect mode" or the "time saving effect mode" is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the "opening effect" includes a "16R probability variation corresponding opening effect", a "8R probability variation corresponding opening effect", a "subject probability corresponding opening effect", and a "time saving corresponding opening effect".

  The "16R probability change correspondence opening effect" is an effect indicating that a positive result is obtained in the immediately preceding reach effect (in the present embodiment, for example, an effect in which a predetermined character shows a manzai to the audience). In the embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 99, the audience receives a manzai, the audience seats are covered in laughter, and as shown in FIG. 100, a delighted character or the like is displayed. It is an effect that continues after the symbols are stopped and displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 62 to 65, a series of effects after the fluctuation stop (in the present embodiment, for example, the audience can be made to laugh, and the curtain is closed with favorable reception). Following the effect, an effect in which a predetermined character (see FIG. 65) is displayed] is performed, and then a predetermined display clearly indicating “16R probability variation jackpot” (eg, FIG. 6). Is a production which reference) is carried out. In the case of executing the “16R probability change correspondence opening effect”, “AA” is set as the “opening command”. In addition, at the time of "16R probability variation jackpot", as shown in FIG. 65, a character that does not appear at the time of "8R probability variation jackpot" is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 66, the character "super" appears before the jackpot character. Since it is displayed, the player can know that the “16R probability variation jackpot” has been won.

  As shown in FIGS. 107 and 108, the “8R probability change correspondence opening effect” is followed by an effect indicating that a positive result is obtained in the immediately preceding reach effect, and after that, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. This is an effect, and a series of effects (FIGS. 62 to 64) are followed by a predetermined display (see FIG. 67) that clearly indicates “8R probability variation big hit”. Note that the character (Fig. 65) displayed at the time of "16R probability variation jackpot" is not displayed at the time of "8R probability variation jackpot", and the character "super" is displayed in front of the jackpot character as shown in Fig. 67. Therefore, the player can know that the “8R probability variation jackpot” is won. When the "8R probability change correspondence opening effect" is executed, "AB" is set as the "opening command". Incidentally, among the opening effects of "8R certainty variation jackpot", the effects before the display (see FIG. 67) that clearly indicates "8R certainty variation jackpot" is displayed are among the opening effects of "16R certainty variation jackpot". , The same as the production before the appearance of the character (see FIG. 65). In other words, the "8R probability variation jackpot" and the "16R probability variation jackpot" share the first half of the opening effect, and the effort involved in effect production and the data capacity on the device side are reduced.

  The "latent probability correspondence opening effect" is an effect executed when "2R probability variation big hit", "2R normal big hit" or "small hit" occurs, and is displayed in the middle symbol display area, for example, as shown in FIG. 73. An effect as if the special symbol ZS being operated is operating (for example, an effect as if the telephone is vibrating or an effect that a ringing sound of the telephone is played from the speaker SP) is performed. When executing the "latent probability correspondence opening effect", "AC" is set as the "opening command". Since the special symbol displayed at the time of the variable stop continues to be displayed as it is from the variable stop to the opening effect, the decorative symbol display device 42 performs a continuous effect from the variable stop to the opening effect. .

  The "time-saving corresponding opening effect" is an effect that is executed when a "2R time-saving big hit", "2R normal big hit" or "small hit" occurs, and, for example, the immediately preceding reach effect (e.g. A negative result in the performance in which the character shows off Manzai (in the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 109, the Manzai is not received by the audience, and the audience seat is wrapped in silence), and then the regulation pattern Is an effect that continues after the combination is displayed (in the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 78, a disappointing character or the like is displayed). In the case of executing the "time saving corresponding opening effect", "AD" is set as the "opening command".

  Returning to FIG. 22, in the process of setting the "opening command" in step S205-16-2-4, "AA" is set as the "opening command" because the "16R probability variation jackpot flag" is on.

  Following step S205-16-2-4, a "release waiting timer" is set in step S205-16-2-5. The "opening waiting timer" is information used to wait for the opening / closing of the opening / closing plate 32b to wait for opening / closing of the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 after the end of the opening effect. The "release waiting timer" is configured to set a predetermined value according to the "opening command", that is, according to the duration of the opening effect. For example, when the duration of the opening effect in "16R probability variation big hit" is 30 seconds (30000 msec), "7500" is set to "release waiting timer" in step S205-16-2-5.

  After setting the "release waiting timer", the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-6 to set the "release waiting flag". The "open wait flag" is state determination information used to determine whether or not the open / close plate 32b can be opened / closed in the hit state, and the open / close plate 32b is opened / closed when the "open wait flag" is turned off. Processing becomes possible.

  After step S205-16-2-6, the process moves to step S205-16-2-7 to turn off the "return flag". In addition, the "return flag" changes the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 42 from the "time saving effect mode" to the "probability change effect mode" which is an effect mode clearly showing that it is the "high probability mode". This is state determination information for determining whether to perform a process (return process), and the "return process" can be executed when the "return flag" is on. In step S205-16-2-7, the "return flag" is turned off when the "return flag" is on and the "return process" is scheduled to be executed, and when various "big hits" occur. This is because the execution of the "return process" is canceled. After the "return flag" is turned off, the "big hit flag" setting process is performed in step S205-16-2-8, and this process ends.

  In addition, in step S205-16-2-1, when the "16R probability variation jackpot flag" is off (S205-16-2-1: NO), the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-9. It is determined whether or not the “8R probability variation jackpot flag” is on. Here, when the "8R probability variation jackpot flag" is on (S205-16-2-9: YES), the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-10, the open / close pattern control table is taken into consideration, and " "7" is set as an initial value in the "remaining open counter".

  In Step S205-16-2-11, which follows Step S205-16-2-10, the specified number K1 is set with reference to the opening / closing pattern control table. In step S205-16-2-11, "10" corresponding to "long open" is set as the specified number K1.

  After setting the specified number K1, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-12, the opening command table is taken into consideration, and the setting process of the "opening command" corresponding to the "8R certainty variation jackpot" is performed. In step S205-16-2-12, "AB" is set as the "opening command" because the "8R certainty variation jackpot flag" is on.

  After step S205-16-2-12, in step S205-16-2-13, the "release waiting timer" corresponding to the duration of the opening effect of "8R certainty variation jackpot" is set. For example, when the duration of the opening effect in “8R probability variation big hit” is 20 seconds (20,000 msec), “5000” is set for the “release waiting timer” in step S205-16-2-13.

  After the setting of the "open waiting timer", the setting processing of the "open waiting flag" in step S205-16-2-6, the OFF processing of the "return flag" in step S205-16-2-7, and step S205-16 The setting process of the "major big hit flag" in -2-8 is performed, and this process ends.

  Further, in step S205-16-2-9, when the "8R probability variation jackpot flag" is off (S205-16-2-9: NO), the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-14, and " It is determined whether or not the “2R probability variation jackpot flag” is on. When the "2R probability variable jackpot flag" is on (S205-16-2-14: YES), the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-15, the open / close pattern control table is taken into consideration, and "remaining" "1" is set as an initial value in the "opening number counter".

  Then, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-16, and the opening / closing pattern control table is taken into consideration to perform the setting process of the specified number K1. In step S205-16-2-16, "3" corresponding to "short open" is set as the specified number K1.

  After setting the specified number K1, the process proceeds to S205-16-2-17, and "AC" is set as the "opening command" in the "2R certainty variation jackpot".

  After step S205-16-2-17, in step S205-16-2-18, the "release waiting timer" corresponding to the duration of the opening effect when "AC" is set as the "opening command" is set. Is set. For example, when the duration of the opening effect when the "opening command" is "AC" is 5 seconds (5000 msec), "1250" is set for the "release waiting timer" in step S205-16-2-18. Is set.

  After setting the "release waiting timer", the processes of steps S205-16-2-6 to S205-16-2-8 are performed, and the present process is terminated.

  When a negative determination is made in step S205-16-2-14, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-19, and it is determined whether or not the "2R hour / hour jackpot flag" is on. When the "2R hour / hour jackpot flag" is ON (S205-16-2-19: YES), the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-20, the open / close pattern control table is taken into consideration, and "the remaining open number "1" is set as an initial value in the "counter".

  Then, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-21, and the opening / closing pattern control table is taken into consideration to set the specified number K1. In step S205-16-2-21, "3" corresponding to "short open" is set as the specified number K1.

  After setting the specified number K1, the process proceeds to S205-16-2-22, and "AD" is set as the "opening command" in the "2R hour / hour jackpot".

  After step S205-16-2-22, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-23, and the "release waiting timer" corresponding to the duration of the opening effect when "AD" is set as the "opening command". Is set. For example, when the duration of the opening effect is 5 seconds (5000 msec) when the "opening command" is "AD", in step S205-16-2-23, "1250" is set for the "release waiting timer". Is set.

  After setting the "release waiting timer", the processes of steps S205-16-2-6 to S205-16-2-8 are performed, and the present process is terminated.

  Furthermore, when a negative determination is made in step S205-16-2-19, that is, when "2R normal big hit" occurs, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-24, and the open / close pattern control table is taken into consideration. Then, "1" is set as the initial value in the "remaining open number counter".

  Next, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-25, the open / close pattern control table is taken into consideration, and the setting process of the specified number K1 is performed. In step S205-16-2-25, "3" corresponding to "short opening" is set as the specified number K1.

  Next, the setting process of the "opening command" corresponding to the "2R normal jackpot" is performed. The "opening command" set when the "2R normal jackpot" occurs may vary depending on the "game state determination value Xj" (that is, the effect mode) at the time of the occurrence. Therefore, prior to the setting process of the "opening command" in the "2R normal jackpot", the determination process of the "game state determination value Xj" is performed.

  Specifically, after step S205-16-2-25, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-26, and it is determined whether the "gaming state determination value Xj" is "1" or "3". To do. Here, when the "gaming state determination value Xj" is "1" or "3" (S205-16-2-26: YES), the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-17, and the "opening command" Is set to "AC". That is, when the production mode is the "normal production mode" or the "latent probability production mode", the same "opening command" as the "opening command" set when the "2R certainty variation jackpot" occurs To be done. Then, in step S205-16-2-18, the "release waiting timer" corresponding to the duration of the opening effect when "AC" is set as the "opening command" is set. After that, the processing of steps S205-16-2-6 to S205-16-2-8 is performed, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the "gaming state determination value Xj" is neither "1" nor "3" (S205-16-2-26: NO), the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-22, and " “AD” is set as the “opening command”. In other words, when the production mode is the "time saving production mode" or the "probability variation production mode", the same "opening command" as the "opening command" set when "2R time reduction jackpot" occurs It Then, in step S205-16-2-23, the "release waiting timer" corresponding to the duration of the opening effect when "AD" is set as the "opening command" is set. After that, the processing of steps S205-16-2-6 to S205-16-2-8 is performed, and this processing ends.

  Returning to the setting processing at the end of fluctuation in FIG. 21, if a negative determination is made in step S205-16-1, the process proceeds to step S205-16-3, the above “small hit winning flag” is taken into consideration, and a stop display is displayed. Determines whether or not it corresponds to "small hit". Here, when it corresponds to "small hit", it moves to step S205-16-4 and performs small hit setting processing. Then, after the end of step S205-16-4, the fluctuation end time setting process ends. In the small hitting setting process, the process for causing the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform the "opening effect" from the stop of the variable display to the start of the prize state, and the opening time of the variable winning device 32 are controlled. Following the "opening production", the necessary processing to start the special prize state is performed. Specifically, in the small hitting setting process, a “small hitting medium flag”, a “remaining open number counter”, a “maximum possible winning number M1”, a “opening waiting timer”, and an “opening command” are set. Next, the small hitting setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S205-16-4-1, referring to the opening / closing pattern control table, the initial value of the “remaining open number counter” at the time of a small hit is set. In this embodiment, "1" is set as the initial value in the "remaining open number counter".

  After step S205-16-4-1, in step S205-16-4-2, the maximum openable number M1 is set with reference to the opening / closing pattern control table. The maximum possible winning number M1 is the maximum total number of game balls that can enter the variable winning device 32 in the small hit state, and is stored in advance in the opening / closing pattern control table. In the present embodiment, "10" is set as the maximum winable number M1.

  After setting the maximum possible winning number M1, the process proceeds to step S205-16-4-3, and it is determined whether or not the “game state determination value Xj” is “1” or “3”. When the "game state determination value Xj" is "1" or "3" (S205-16-4-3: YES), the process proceeds to step S205-16-4-4, and "opening command" is set to " AC ”is set. That is, when the production mode is the "normal production mode" or the "latent probability production mode", the same "opening command" as the "opening command" set when the "2R certainty variation jackpot" occurs To be done. Therefore, in the "normal effect mode" and the "latent probability effect mode", based on the opening effect, the "2R certainty variation jackpot" in which the lottery mode is "high probability mode" and the current lottery mode are maintained as they are. It is not possible to distinguish between "small hits".

  After step S205-16-4-4, in step S205-16-4-5, the "release waiting timer" corresponding to the duration of the opening effect when "AC" is set as the "opening command" is set. Is set.

  Then, in step S205-16-4-6, the "open wait flag" setting process is performed, and in step S205-16-4-7, the "small hitting flag" is set, and this process ends. In the small hitting setting process, the "return flag" is not turned off unlike the big hitting setting process. In other words, the execution of the "return effect" (return process) is not canceled due to the occurrence of a small hit.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S205-16-4-3, the process proceeds to step S205-16-4-8, and "AD" is set as the "opening command". In other words, when the production mode is the "time saving production mode" or the "probability variation production mode", the same "opening command" as the "opening command" set when "2R time reduction jackpot" occurs It Therefore, in the "probable variation production mode", the lottery mode is changed (falls) from the "high probability mode" to the "low probability mode" based on the opening production, and "2R short-time jackpot" and the lottery mode are "high". It is not possible to distinguish from "small hits" that are maintained as "probability mode."

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52, an “opening command” set when “2R normal big hit” occurs and an “opening command” set when “small hit” occurs Are configured to be the same. Therefore, based on the opening effect, it is not possible to distinguish between "2R normal jackpot" in which the lottery mode is changed to "low probability mode" and "small win" in which the current lottery mode is maintained as it is. There is.

  After step S205-16-4-8, in step S205-16-4-9, the "release waiting timer" corresponding to the duration of the opening effect when "AD" is set as the "opening command" is set. To be done.

  Then, in step S205-16-4-6, the "open wait flag" setting process is performed, and in step S205-16-4-7, the "small hitting flag" is set, and this process ends.

  Returning to the setting processing at the end of fluctuation in FIG. 21, if a negative determination is made in step S205-16-3, the process proceeds to step S205-16-5, and the counter value of the “support frequency counter” is “0”. Determine whether or not.

  In step S205-16-5, if the counter value of the “support frequency counter” is “0”, this processing ends. On the other hand, when the "support counter" is set (when the counter value is other than "0"), it is considered that the "high support mode" is being set, and the "support counter" is set in step S205-16-6. Is subtracted by 1. Then, it transfers to step S205-16-7.

  In step S205-16-7, it is determined whether the "return flag" is set. Then, when the "return flag" is set (S205-16-7: YES), the process proceeds to step S205-16-8 and the return process is performed.

  The "return flag" is information used for determining whether or not to perform the return process, and is set when a "small hit" occurs in the "probability variation effect mode" in a small hit end setting process described later. (Step S206-14-5-3).

  Next, the return processing of step S205-16-8 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the return process, first, in step S205-16-8-1, the value of the "return counter" that can be set in the small hit end setting process (steps S206-14-5, S206-14-5-4) described later. Is subtracted by 1. Next, in step S205-16-8-2, it is determined whether the value of the "return counter" is "0". Here, when the value of the "return counter" is not "0" (S205-16-8-2: NO), the return processing ends. The "return counter" is a numerical value that defines the timing of the return processing to the "probability variation effect mode" described above.

  On the other hand, when the value of the "return counter" is "0" (S205-16-8-2: YES), it is the timing to perform the above-described return processing to the "probability variation effect mode", and therefore, first. In step S205-16-8-3, the "return effect command" is set. The "return production command" is a "return production command" that clearly indicates that the production mode is changed to the "probable variation production mode" (break stage in the present embodiment) after the fluctuation stop and is in the "high probability mode". This is a command output to the sub-control device 262 in order to cause the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform "effect". The sub-control device 262 to which the “return effect command” is input controls the display control device 45, and as shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the “return effect” [in the display section 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42]. In the present embodiment, for example, a predetermined character is displayed and a character such as a character indicating a transition to the "probability variation effect mode" (in the present embodiment, "break mode re-entry") is displayed] Let

  Returning to FIG. 24, following the setting of the “return effect command”, in step S205-16-8-4, the “game state determination value Xj” is set to “4”. As a result, the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 42 from the time of the next change is set to the “probable change effect mode”. Next, in step S205-16-8-5, the "return flag" is turned off. Thereafter, in S205-16-8-6, the setting process of the "game state notification command" is performed, and the return process is ended.

  The “game state notification command” is a command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of the effect mode that is newly set after the jackpot is over. The “game state notification command” includes the “game state determination value Xj” related to the new effect mode.

  Now, returning to the description of the setting process at the end of fluctuation in FIG. 21, when the “return flag” is not set (S205-16-7: NO), or after the end of the return process (S205-16-8) Then, the process proceeds to step S205-16-9, and it is determined whether or not the counter value of the “support counter” is “0”. That is, it is determined whether or not the variable display of this time is the variable display of the predetermined number of times after the jackpot is finished (after the high support mode is given). Here, if the value of the “support counter” is “0”, the value of the “support mode flag” is switched to “A0” indicating the “low support mode” in step S205-16-10.

  The "support mode flag" is state determination information for determining the state of the winning support mode. In this embodiment, as the flag value of the “support mode flag”, “A0” is set when the winning support mode is the “low support mode”, and when the winning support mode is the “high support mode” "A1" is set. Incidentally, the value "A" of the upper 4 bits in the "support mode flag" is added uniformly for noise countermeasures, and is not particularly for determining the game state.

  Further, along with the switching processing of the "support mode flag" in step S205-16-10, the "gaming state determination value Xj" is set to "1" in step S205-16-11. As a result, the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 42 from the time of the next change is set to the “normal effect mode”. When selecting a stage in the "normal effect mode" by the main control device 261, a plurality of "game state determination values Xj" corresponding to each stage in the "normal effect mode" are selected in step S205-16-11. One of them is randomly selected.

  Further, in the following step S205-16-12, a "game state notification command" (including the "game state determination value Xj" set to "1") is set, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S205-16-9 that the counter value of the “support counter” is not “0”, this processing ends. In the setting process at the end of fluctuation, the big hit setting process (step S205-16-2) or the small hit setting process (step S205-16-4) is performed, and the "big hit medium flag" or "small hit medium flag" is set. In such a case, the “lottery mode flag” may be reset once (“50” is set) and the “high probability mode” may be interrupted during the big hit or the small hit.

  Now, returning to FIG. 10, in the normal processing, following step S205, the variable winning device control processing of step S206 is executed. In this process, the control content of the variable winning device 32 is set as to what kind of control is to be performed in the variable winning device 32. As a result, in the case of a big hit state or a small hit state, the opening / closing process of the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times.

  Next, the variable winning device control processing of step S206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S206-1, it is determined whether or not the "open wait flag" is on. Here, when the "release waiting flag" is ON (S206-1: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-2, and the "release waiting timer" is decremented by one. After that, the process shifts to step S206-3, and it is determined whether or not the "release waiting timer" is 0. That is, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the stop of fluctuation is equal to or longer than the waiting time until the opening / closing operation (special prize state) is started on the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32. Here, when the "opening waiting timer" is 0 (S206-3: YES), it is the start timing of the opening / closing operation (special prize state) on the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32, so the process proceeds to step S206-4. After that, the "release waiting flag" is turned off. On the other hand, if the "opening wait timer" is not 0 (S206-3: NO), the opening timing of the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 has not yet been reached, and this processing is ended.

  After turning off the "opening waiting flag" in step S206-4, 0 is set as an initial value in the "opening counter" in step S206-5. In addition, the "opening number counter" is a state determination for determining the cumulative number of times the special prize state is executed during the big hit state or the small hit state, that is, the cumulative number of times the opening / closing process of the opening / closing plate 32b is executed during the hit state. Information.

  After step S206-5, or when a negative determination is made in step S206-1, the process proceeds to step S206-6, and it is determined whether or not the "big hit medium flag" is on. Here, when the "big hit medium flag" is on (S206-6: YES), that is, a big hit occurs, and the waiting for the opening / closing process on the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is released (opening effect). Is completed), the processes of steps S206-7 to S206-9 are performed, and 1 is added to the initial value of the "remaining open number counter" set in the above-mentioned jackpot setting process to open and close the open / close plate 32b. Open / close operation.

  More specifically, first, in step S206-7, it is determined whether or not the value of the “opening counter” is 0. Here, when the value of the "opening number counter" is 0 (S206-7: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-8, and the jackpot special state starting process is performed. That is, the setting process relating to the opening of the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 in the first round is performed. The jackpot special state start process is performed for each round, and in the process, the "first variable flag", the "first variable timer", and the "winning counter" necessary for the opening / closing process of the opening / closing plate 32b. The setting process of “Vx” is performed, and the “xx round release command” described later is set. Further, only the process related to the first round of the special prize state start process at the time of jackpot is branched to when the value of the “opening number counter” is 0 (S206-7: YES) (step S206-8). The jackpot special state start process relating to the other rounds is performed in the jackpot variable winning device control process (step S206-9) described later.

  Here, the jackpot special state start process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S206-8-1, the "first variable flag" is turned on. The "first variable flag" is state determination information for determining whether or not the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is open. In the present embodiment, when the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is in the open state, the "first variable flag" is turned on (the flag value is set to "1"), and the opening / closing plate of the variable winning device 32 is set. When 32b is in the closed state, the "first variable flag" is turned off ("0" is set as the flag value).

  Next, the process proceeds to step S206-8-2, and "win prize counter Vx" is set to 0 as an initial value. The “winning counter Vx” is a winning counting means for counting the number of game balls that have won the variable winning device 32. In the present embodiment, in the switch reading process S301 (see FIG. 11) of the timer interrupt process, it is determined whether or not there is a prize for the variable winning device 32 based on the detection information of the count switch 223, and the prize for the variable winning device 32 is won. If it is determined that there is, the value of the “winning counter Vx” is incremented by 1. The "winning counter Vx" is reset every round in the case of a big hit (0 is set as an initial value), but in the case of a small hit, the initial value is set in the first opening. After that, the reset is not performed in the subsequent opening. That is, in the case of a small hit, the "winning counter Vx" measures the total number of winning game balls for the variable winning device 32 in the small hit state.

  After step S206-8-2, 1 is added to the "opening counter" in step S206-8-3. For example, in the first big hit special prize starting process at the time of big hit, 1 is added to the initial value (0) of the “open count counter” and the “open count counter” is updated to 1.

  After step S206-8-3, the process proceeds to step S206-8-4, and the setting process of the "first variable timer" is performed. The "first variable timer" is a measuring means for measuring the opening time of the variable winning device 32 (the time when the special prize state occurs), the interval between the special prize states, etc. This is taken into consideration when determining whether or not the specified time has elapsed since the end of opening. In step S206-8-4, the maximum opening time per opening / closing operation corresponding to each type is set in the "first variable timer" by referring to the opening / closing pattern control table (see FIG. 51). For example, when the opening mode of the opening / closing plate 32b is the “long open” such as “16R probability variation jackpot”, “7500” is set in the “first variable timer”, and “2R probability variation jackpot” or “2R”. When the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing plate 32b is the "short open" like "normal jackpot", "100" is set to the "first variable timer". As a result, the maximum opening time (specified time) per opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 32b is set to "30 seconds" in the case of "long opening" and "0.4 seconds in the case of" short opening ". Will be set.

  After setting the "first variable timer", the process proceeds to step S206-8-5, and it is determined whether the "16R certainty variation jackpot flag" or the "8R certainty variation jackpot flag" is on. Here, when the "16R probability variation jackpot flag" or the "8R probability variation jackpot flag" is on (S206-8-5: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-8-6, and the round opening stored in the ROM 502 is opened. The setting process of the "xx round opening command" is performed based on the command table (see FIG. 53) (note that the current round number, that is, the value of the "opening number counter" is substituted for "xx"). After the setting of the "xx round release command", this processing ends.

  In addition, the "xx round opening command" is transmitted to the sub-control device 262 in order to execute the opening effect which is performed during the opening of the variable winning device 32 in the winning state on the display section 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42. It is a command. The “xx round opening command” is set according to the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened. For example, the “1 round opening command” is set in the first opening and the “XX round opening command” is set in the second opening. 2 round open command ”is set.

  Furthermore, the "xx round opening command" in the present embodiment has a 2-byte structure, the upper byte is composed of information corresponding to the performance during opening, and the lower byte is the value of the "opening counter", that is, during the big hit. It is configured by information indicating the number of opening operations (the value of the “opening counter” in the present embodiment).

  It should be noted that the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between the "xx round opening command" and the production during opening in a table. When the sub-control device 262 receives the "xx round opening command", the display control device 45 receives the command. By controlling, the decorative symbol display device 42 is caused to perform the opening effect corresponding to the received “xx round opening command”.

  In the setting process of the "xx round opening command" in step S206-8-6, since the "16R certainty variation jackpot flag" or the "8R certainty variation jackpot flag" is on, the "xx round opening command" is set, as shown in FIG. “BAxx” is set as The sub control device 262 that has received “BAxx” as the “xx round opening command” controls the display control device 45 to cause the display part 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform the opening production. In the opening effect at this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 68, as shown in FIG. 68, information such as a numerical value indicating what open eye (round) is displayed and a predetermined character is displayed. Is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the “xx round opening command” corresponding to the “16R certainty variation jackpot” and the “xx round opening command” corresponding to the “8R certainty variation jackpot” are common commands. During the first round to the eighth round, the same opening performance will be performed. Since a common open production is performed by using a common command, it is possible to reduce the time and effort for production of production, and to reduce the data capacity and processing load.

  When a negative determination is made in step S206-8-5, the process proceeds to step S206-8-7, and it is determined whether or not the "2R certainty variation jackpot flag" is on. When the “2R probability variable jackpot flag” is on (S206-8-7: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-8-8, and the “lottery mode flag” is taken into consideration to be the “high probability mode”. Or not. Then, when a negative determination is made in step S206-8-8 (in the "low probability mode"), the process proceeds to step S206-8-9, and the "gaming state determination value Xj" is "2". That is, it is determined whether or not the current effect mode is the "time saving effect mode". If a negative determination is made in step S206-8-9, that is, if it is the "normal effect mode" or the "latent probability effect mode" of the "low probability mode", the process proceeds to step S206-8-10, With reference to the round release command table, “BBxx” is set as the “xx round release command”. After the setting of the "xx round release command", this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S206-8-8 or step S206-8-9, the process proceeds to step S206-8-11, the round open command table is taken into consideration, and "xx round "BDxx" is set as the "open command". After the setting of the "xx round release command", this processing ends.

  When a negative determination is made in step S206-8-7, the process proceeds to step S206-8-12, and it is determined whether or not the "2R hour / hour jackpot flag" is on. Then, when the "2R hour / hour jackpot flag" is on (S206-8-12: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-8-13, the round opening command table is taken into consideration, and "xx round opening command". “BCxx” is set as After the setting of the "xx round release command", this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S206-8-12, that is, when it is considered that "2R normal jackpot" has occurred, the process proceeds to step S206-8-14, and "gaming state determination value Xj". Is "1" or "3". When the "gaming state determination value Xj" is "1" or "3" (S206-8-14: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-8-10, the round opening command table is taken into consideration, and " “BBxx” is set as the “xx round release command”, and this processing ends. That is, when the "2R normal jackpot" occurs when the effect mode is the "normal effect mode" or the "latent probability effect mode", the pre-stage of the ending effect indicating the transition to the "latent probability effect mode" Directing in.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S206-8-14, the process proceeds to step S206-8-13, "BCxx" is set as the "xx round release command", and the present process is ended. . That is, when the "2R normal big hit" occurs when the effect mode is "time saving effect mode" or "probability variation effect mode", the same opening effect as when "2R time saving big hit" occurs is performed. Be seen.

  Returning to the variable winning device control process of FIG. 25, when a negative determination is made in step S206-7 or after the jackpot special state starting process of step S206-8, the process proceeds to step S206-9, and the jackpot variable. Perform the winning device control process. Next, the jackpot variable winning device control process will be described with reference to FIG. 27.

  First, in step S206-9-1, the count value of the "first variable timer" is decremented by one.

  In a succeeding step S206-9-2, it is determined whether or not the "first variable flag" is on. If an affirmative determination is made here, that is, if the variable winning device 32 is in the open state, the processing in steps S206-9-3 to S206-9-7 is performed.

  More specifically, first, in step S206-9-3, it is determined whether or not the count value of the “first variable timer” is “0”, that is, one opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 32b (“long opening” or “short opening”). )) Per open time (specified time “30 seconds” or “0.4 seconds”) is determined.

  When a negative determination is made in step S206-9-3, the flow proceeds to step S206-9-4, and it is determined whether or not the value of the "winning counter Vx" is equal to or more than the specified number K1, that is, in one prize state. It is determined whether or not the number of game balls that have won the variable winning device 32 has reached the maximum planned number of winnings (specified number “10” or “3”). If a negative determination is made in step S206-9-4, that is, if the timing for closing the variable winning device 32 (timing for ending the special prize state) has not yet come, this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S206-9-3 or step S206-9-4, that is, if it is the timing to close the variable winning a prize device 32 (which is currently in the open state), Progressing to S206-9-5, whether or not the counter value of the "remaining open number counter" is "0", that is, the number of executions of the special prize state ("long open" or "short open") has reached the specified number. Or not.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S206-9-5, an open end setting process is carried out in step S206-9-6, and this process ends. In the open end setting process of step S206-9-6, the "first variable flag" is turned off and the "big hit end flag" is turned on. As a result, the variable winning device 32 is closed, and the process for ending the jackpot state can be executed. The “big hit end flag” is state determination information used when determining the end of the big hit state in step S206-9-9.

  When a negative determination is made in step S206-9-5, that is, when the number of executions of the special prize state (“long open” or “short open”) has not reached the specified number, a big hit in step S206-9-7. The special prize sending process is performed, and this process ends. Next, the jackpot special prize sending process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S206-9-7-1, the "first variable flag" is turned off. As a result, the variable winning device 32 is closed. By turning off the "first variable flag", if the jackpot is in the jackpot state (S206-6: YES), a negative determination is made in step S206-9-2. That is, when the variable winning device 32 is in the open state (the "first variable flag" is on), the processing in steps S206-9-3 to S206-9-7 is performed, and the variable winning device 32 is If it is in the closed state (the "first variable flag" is off), the processing in S206-9-8 to S206-9-11 is performed.

  After step S206-9-7-1, the value of the "remaining open number counter" is decremented by 1 in step S206-9-7-2. Subsequently, in step S206-9-7-3, the "first variable timer" setting process is performed. In step S206-9-7-3, whether or not a predetermined time has passed from the end of the prize state to the "first variable timer" (for example, whether a predetermined time has passed from the end of the jackpot, a predetermined prize state) In order to determine whether or not an interval from the end of the above to the start of the next prize state), the above open / close pattern control table is taken into consideration, and a value "e.g. 750 "or" 250 "corresponding to" 1 second "is set.

  In Step S206-9-7-4 following Step S206-9-7-3, it is determined whether or not the "16R certainty variation jackpot flag" or the "8R certainty variation jackpot flag" is on. If an affirmative decision is made in step S206-9-7-4, then the flow shifts to step S206-9-7-5, where "xx rounds" is entered based on the round close command table (see FIG. 54) stored in the ROM 502. Setting processing of "close command" is performed (note that the current round number, that is, the value of the "opening number counter" is substituted for "xx"). After the "xx round close command" is set, this processing ends.

  In addition, the "xx round closing command" is transmitted to the sub-control device 262 in order to execute the closing effect which is performed during the closing of the variable winning device 32 in the hit state on the display portion 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42. It is a command. Further, the "xx round closing command" is set according to the number of times the variable winning device 32 is closed. For example, in the first closing (at the end of the first round), the "1 round closing command" is set. Then, at the second closing, a "two round closing command" is set.

  Further, the “xx round closing command” in the present embodiment has a 2-byte configuration, the upper byte is configured by information corresponding to the closing performance, and the lower byte is the value of the “opening counter”, that is, during the big hit. It is configured by information indicating the number of times the closing operation is performed (the value of the “opening number counter” in this embodiment).

  Note that the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between the “xx round close command” and the closing production in a table, and when the sub-control device 262 receives the “xx round close command”, the display control device 45. By controlling, the effect during closing corresponding to the received “xx round opening command” will be executed by the decorative symbol display device 42.

  In the setting process of the "xx round close command" in step S206-9-7-5, since "16R probability variation big hit flag" or "8R probability variation big hit flag" is turned on, "CAxx" is set as "xx round closing command". Is set. After the "xx round close command" is set, this processing ends.

  The sub-control device 262, which has received “CAxx” as the “xx round closing command”, controls the display control device 45 to cause the display section 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 to display the immediately preceding opening effect (“xx The closing production (for example, refer to FIG. 69) is performed subsequent to the opening production performed when “BAxx” is set as the “round opening command”. That is, in the case of "16R probability variation big hit" or "8R probability variation jackpot", the effect corresponding to one special prize state can be obtained by alternately performing the opening effect and the closing effect on the decorative pattern display device 42. By being performed in each round, the effect in the big hit state is performed. In the present embodiment, when the "16R probability variable jackpot" or "8R probability variable jackpot" is won, different open performances are performed in each prize state (each round) of the variable winning device 32. There is.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S206-9-7-4, the flow proceeds to step S206-9-7-6, and it is determined whether or not the "2R certainty variation jackpot flag" is on. When the "2R probability variation jackpot flag" is on (S206-9-7-6: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-9-7-7, and the "lottery mode flag" is taken into consideration to determine the "high probability". Mode "is determined. Then, when a negative determination is made in step S206-9-7-7 (in the "low probability mode"), the process proceeds to step S206-9-7-8, and the "gaming state determination value Xj" is set. It is determined whether it is “2”, that is, whether the current effect mode is the “time saving effect mode”. When a negative determination is made in step S206-9-7-8, that is, in the case of the "normal effect mode" or the "latent probability effect mode" of the "low probability mode", step S206-9-7-9 Then, referring to the round closing command table, “CBxx” is set as the “xx round closing command”. After the "xx round close command" is set, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S206-9-7-7 or step S206-9-7-8, the process proceeds to step S206-9-7-10, and the round closing command table is taken into consideration. Then, “CDxx” is set as the “xx round close command”. After the setting of the "xx round release command", this processing ends.

  In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S206-9-7-6, the flow proceeds to step S206-9-7-11, and it is determined whether or not the "2R hour / minor big hit flag" is on. Then, when the “2R hour / short jackpot flag” is on (S206-9-7-11: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-9-7-12, and the round closing command table is taken into consideration to select “xx Set "CCxx" as the "close round command". After the setting of the "xx round release command", this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S206-9-7-11, that is, when it is considered that "2R normal jackpot" has occurred, the process proceeds to step S206-9-7-13, and "game state" It is determined whether the determination value Xj ”is“ 1 ”or“ 3 ”. When the “gaming state determination value Xj” is “1” or “3” (S206-9-7-13: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-9-7-9. Then, referring to the round closing command table, "CBxx" is set as the "xx round closing command", and this processing is ended. That is, when the "2R normal jackpot" occurs when the effect mode is the "normal effect mode" or the "latent probability effect mode", the pre-stage of the ending effect indicating the transition to the "latent probability effect mode" Directing in.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S206-9-7-13, the process proceeds to step S206-7-9-12. Then, referring to the round closing command table, "CCxx" is set as the "xx round closing command", and this processing is ended. That is, when the production mode is the “time saving production mode” or the “probability variation production mode”, when the “2R normal jackpot” occurs, the same closed production as when the “2R time saving jackpot” occurs. Be seen.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of "2R probability variation big hit", "2R short-time big hit" or "2R normal big hit", the opening effect and the closing effect are alternated twice in the decorative pattern display device 42. It is configured such that a series of big hit mid-stage productions (which is impossible or difficult to distinguish between the open mid-stage productions and the closed mid-stage productions) is executed by performing them one by one.

  For example, the sub-control device 262, which has received “BBxx” as the “xx round opening command” and “CBxx” as the “xx round closing command”, controls the display control device 45 to thereby display the decorative symbol display device 42. In the display section 42a of "the big hit in the latent accuracy correspondence effect" is performed. The "potential probability big hit mid effect" is performed subsequent to the "latent probability correspondence opening effect" (see FIG. 73), and the effect mode from the time of the next change is set to the "potential accuracy effect mode". If executed. In the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 74, an effect of displaying a predetermined character or the like on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed as the “latent probability-compatible big hit mid-time effect”.

  Further, for example, the sub control device 262 which receives “BCxx” as the “xx round opening command” and “CCxx” as the “xx round closing command” controls the display control device 45 to display the decorative symbol. On the display unit 42a of the device 42, "time-saving, big hit, mid-stage effect" is performed. The "time saving big hit mid effect" is performed subsequent to the "time saving corresponding opening effect" (see FIG. 78), and is executed when the effect mode from the next change time is set to "time saving effect mode". To be done. In the present embodiment, as the “time saving big hit medium effect”, for example, as shown in FIG. 79, an effect of displaying a predetermined character or the like on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

  Further, for example, the sub control device 262 which receives “BDxx” as the “xx round opening command” and “CDxx” as the “xx round closing command” controls the display control device 45 to display the decorative symbol. In the display section 42a of the device 42, "promotion for big hit during promotion" is performed. The "elevation corresponding opening production" is performed after the "latent probability corresponding opening production" (see FIG. 73), and is executed when the production mode from the time of the next change is set to the "probability variation production mode". To be done. In the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 77, an effect of displaying a character or the like on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed as the “promotion corresponding to big hit middle”.

  In addition, case classification processing (steps S206-9-7-4, steps S206-9-7-6 to S206-9-7-8, step S206-9-7) in the previous stage of setting the "xx round close command". -11 and step S206-9-7-13), case classification processing (step S206-8-5, steps S206-8-7 to S206-8-9, in the previous stage of setting the "xx round release command"). The process is the same as steps S206-8-12 and S206-8-14). Therefore, the case classification process in the previous stage of setting the “xx round open command” or the “xx round close command” is made into a subroutine, and this subroutine process is executed as the jackpot special state starting process (step S206-8) and the jackpot. It may be commonly used in the hour special prize sending process (step S206-9-7). In this case, the data capacity can be reduced.

  The type of the "xx round close command" that is set corresponds to the type of the "xx round open command" (for example, when "BAxx" is set as the "xx round open command", "xx" is set. When "CAxx" is always set as the "round closing command" and "BBxx" is set as the "xx round opening command", "CBxx" is always set as the "xx round closing command". That is, in this embodiment, the lower 4 bits of the upper byte are common information in the set “xx round open command” and “xx round close command” (for example, “xx round open command”). When “BAxx” is set as the “command” and “CAxx” is set as the “xx round closing command”, the lower 4 bits “A” of the upper byte is common). Therefore, in the initial jackpot special state start process at the time of a jackpot, the common information is obtained by performing the case classification process, and the subsequent "xx round open command" and "xx round close command" are set. May be configured to use the acquired common information without performing the case classification process. In this case, the processing load can be reduced.

  Returning to FIG. 27, if a negative determination is made in step S206-9-2, the flow proceeds to step S206-9-8, and it is determined whether the value of the "first variable timer" is "0". In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S206-9-2, that is, when the “first variable flag” is off, the value of the “first variable timer” becomes the remaining time of the interval time. There is. Therefore, the process of step S206-9-8 is a process of determining whether or not it is within a predetermined time after the end of the prize state (within a predetermined time after the end of winning, or during an interval between the prize states).

  If the affirmative determination is made in step S206-9-8, that is, the predetermined time has passed from the end of the prize state, and the timing to move to the next process (start of the next prize state or start of the ending effect) is reached. If so, the process proceeds to step S206-9-9. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S206-9-8, this processing is ended as it is.

  In step S206-9-9, it is determined whether or not the jackpot state is to be ended, with reference to the "big hit end flag". When a negative determination is made in step S206-9-9, that is, when it is not the end time of the jackpot state, the jackpot special state start process is performed in step S206-9-10, and then this process is finished. The jackpot special state starting process in step S206-9-10 is the same as the process in step S206-8.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S206-9-9, the jackpot end setting process is carried out in step S206-9-11, and then this process is ended.

  In the jackpot end setting process of step S206-9-11, the "big hit medium flag" and the "big hit end flag" are turned off, the "lottery mode flag" switching process, the "support mode flag" switching process, and the "support count" A "counter" setting process, a "game state notification command" setting process, an "ending command" setting process, and the like are performed.

  In addition, the "ending command" is displayed on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 in order to perform "ending effect" that is performed immediately before the normal game started after the "big hit state" or the "small hit state". It is output to the control device 262. The “ending effect” is performed, for example, to notify the type of effect mode set after the end of the big hit or the small hit, the switching of the lottery mode, the end of the big hit or the small hit, and the like.

  In the present embodiment, the “ending effect” includes a “probability change-compatible ending effect”, a “latent probability compatible ending effect”, and a “time saving compatible ending effect”.

  As shown in FIG. 70, the "probability change ending effect" clearly shows that the lottery mode from the next change is the "high probability mode" (in the present embodiment, for example, "break mode rush"). It is a production in which characters such as are displayed, and by this production, the player can understand that the "probability variation production mode" to which the "high probability mode" has been added will be applied from the next variation), and as an "ending command". “EA” is set.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the "latent probability corresponding ending effect" is an effect that indicates to the player that the effect mode from the next change is the "latent probability effect mode" (in the present embodiment, for example, "sales It is a production in which characters such as "mode entry" are displayed. It should be noted that, in the "latent probability compatible ending effect", it is not possible to determine whether the lottery mode from the next variation is the "high probability mode" or the "low probability mode". In addition, when executing the “latent probability corresponding ending effect”, “EB” is set as the “ending command”.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the "time-saving corresponding ending effect" allows the player to understand that the effect mode after the next change will be the "time-saving effect mode", but the lottery mode is the "high probability mode". It is an effect in which it is not possible to determine whether it is "low probability mode" (in the present embodiment, for example, an effect in which characters such as "training mode entry" are displayed), and "EC" is set as the "ending command". To be done.

  Here, the jackpot end setting process will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, in step S206-9-11-1, the "big hit medium flag" is turned off. Further, in step S206-9-11-2, the "big hit end flag" is turned off.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-3, and it is determined whether or not the "8R certainty variation jackpot flag" or the "16R certainty variation jackpot flag" is set.

  When "8R probability variation big hit flag" or "16R probability variation big hit flag" is set (S206-9-11-3: YES), it moves to step S206-9-11-4 and "lottery mode flag". “53” indicating the “high probability mode” is set as the flag value of Succeedingly, in a step S206-9-11-5, the value of the "support counter" is set to a value that cannot be reached (e.g., "99999" corresponding to the variation display 999999 times).

  Furthermore, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-6, and the flag value of the "support mode flag" is set to "A1" indicating that it is the "high support mode".

  Next, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-7, and the "ending command" is set based on the ending command table (see FIG. 55). Here, since the “8R certainty variation jackpot flag” or the “16R certainty variation jackpot flag” is on, “EA” is set as the “ending command”.

  Then, it transfers to step S206-9-11-8 and sets "the game state determination value Xj" at "4". That is, when "8R probability variation big hit" or "16R probability variation jackpot" occurs, the effect mode after the jackpot is set to "probability variation performance mode" regardless of the effect mode at the present time. Then, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-9, and the "game state notification command" including the "game state determination value Xj" set to "4" is set.

  Moreover, when neither "8R probability variation jackpot flag" nor "16R probability variation jackpot flag" is on (S206-9-11-3: NO), it transfers to step S206-9-11-10 and carries out "2R. It is determined whether or not the "probable variation jackpot flag" is on. When the "2R probability variable jackpot flag" is on (S206-9-11-10: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-11, and the "high-probability mode" is taken into consideration by considering the "lottery mode flag". Or not. If an affirmative decision is made in step S206-9-11-11, then the procedure advances to step S206-9-11-4, and the same processing as if an affirmative decision is made in step S206-9-11-3 ( S206-9-11-4 to S206-9-11-8) are performed.

  On the other hand, when it is not in the "high probability mode" (S206-9-11-11: NO), the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-12 and the "gaming state determination value Xj" is "2"? Determine whether or not. When the "gaming state determination value Xj" is "2" (S206-9-11-12: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-4, and affirmative determination is made in step S206-9-11-3. The same processing (S206-9-11-4 to S206-9-11-8) as when the determination is made is performed.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when "8R probability variation jackpot" or "16R probability variation jackpot" occurs, "2R probability variation jackpot" occurs in "high probability mode", and "time saving of low probability mode". When "2R probability variation big hit" occurs in "production mode", "high probability mode" and "until next time / high support mode" are added, and the production mode from the next fluctuation clearly shows that Mode ".

  By the way, when a negative determination is made in step S206-9-11-12, that is, when the effect mode is the "normal effect mode", or when the "low probability mode" and the effect mode is the "latent probability effect mode". In some cases, the process proceeds to S206-9-11-13, and "53" indicating the "high probability mode" is set as the flag value of the "lottery mode flag".

  Succeedingly, in a step S206-9-11-14, "0" is set to the value of "support counter". Furthermore, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-15, and the flag value of the "support mode flag" is set to "A0" indicating that it is the "low support mode".

  Next, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-16, and the "ending command" is set based on the ending command table. Here, since it is the "latent probability production mode" of the "normal production mode" or the "low probability mode" and the "2R certainty variation jackpot flag" is on, "EB" is set as the "ending command". .

  Then, it transfers to step S206-9-11-17 and sets "the game state determination value Xj" to "3". That is, the production mode after the big hit is set to the "latent probability production mode". Then, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-9, and the "game state notification command" including the "game state determination value Xj" set to "3" is set.

  In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S206-9-11-10, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-18, and it is determined whether or not the "2R hour / short jackpot flag" is on. Here, when the "2R hour / hour jackpot flag" is on (S206-9-11-18: YES), the process proceeds to S206-9-11-19, and the flag value of the "lottery mode flag" is "low". “50” indicating that it is the “probability mode” is set. Furthermore, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-20, and "100" is set to the value of the "support number counter".

  Succeedingly, in a step S206-9-11-21, the flag value of the "support mode flag" is set to "A1" indicating that the "high support mode" is set.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-22, and the "ending command" is set based on the ending command table. Here, since the “2R hour / hour jackpot flag” is on, “EC” is set as the “ending command”.

  Then, it transfers to step S206-9-11-23 and sets "the game state determination value Xj" at "2". That is, the production mode after the big hit is set to the "time saving production mode". Then, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-9, and the "game state notification command" including the "game state determination value Xj" set to "2" is set.

  Furthermore, when a negative determination is made in step S206-9-11-18, that is, when the "2R normal jackpot flag" is turned on, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-24, and the "gaming state" It is determined whether the determination value Xj ”is“ 1 ”or“ 3 ”. When a negative determination is made in step S206-9-11-24, that is, the "game state determination value Xj" is "2" or "4", and the effect mode is "time saving effect mode" or "probability variation effect mode". If it is, the processes of steps S206-9-11-19 to S206-9-11-23 are performed, and the "game state notification command" is set in step S206-9-11-9. . That is, when the "2R normal big hit" occurs in the "time saving effect mode" or the "probability variation effect mode", the same support frequency and lottery mode as when the "2R time saving big hit" occurs are set.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S206-9-11-24, that is, when the effect mode is the "normal effect mode" or the "latent probability effect mode", step S206-9-11-25. Then, the flag value of the “lottery mode flag” is set to “50” indicating the “low probability mode”. After that, the process proceeds to Step S206-9-11-14, the processes of Steps S206-9-11-14 to S206-9-11-17 are performed, and the "gaming state" is performed at Step S206-9-11-9. Notification command "is set. That is, when "2R normal jackpot" occurs in the "normal production mode" or the "latent probability production mode", the number of support times, the support mode, and the production mode are the same as the number of support when "2R certainty variation jackpot" is won. However, the lottery mode is a “low-probability mode”, unlike the lottery mode when the “2R probability variation big hit” is won.

  After setting the "game state notification command" in step S206-9-11-9, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-26, and the "big hit winning flag" and various "big hit flags" ("16R probability variation big hit flag" etc. ) Is turned off, and this processing ends.

  In addition, the switching setting process (S206-9-11-4, S206-9-11-13, S206-9-11-19, S206-9-11-25) of the "lottery mode flag" in the main controller 261 is performed. The function to perform constitutes the mode switching means and the mode determining means in this embodiment.

  By the way, the above has described the control process in the case where an affirmative determination is made in step S206-6 (see FIG. 25), that is, in the variable winning control process, when a jackpot such as “16R probability variation jackpot” or the like occurs. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 25, when a negative determination is made in step S206-6, the process proceeds to step S206-10, and it is determined whether or not the "small hitting flag" is on. Then, if a negative determination is made in step S206-10, that is, if both the "big hit medium flag" and the "small hit medium flag" are off, this processing (variable winning device control processing) is ended. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S206-10, that is, if a small hit has occurred, the processing from step S206-11 onward is performed. Therefore, next, of the variable winning control process, a control process when a small hit occurs will be described.

  First, in step S206-11, it is determined whether or not the value of the "opening counter" is 0. Here, when the value of the "opening number counter" is 0 (S206-11: YES), that is, when the variable winning device 32 has never been in the open state after the small hit occurs, It moves to S206-12. Then, in step S206-12, "0" is set as an initial value in the "winning prize counter Vx". As described above, at the time of a big hit, the "winning prize counter Vx" is reset every one opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 32 (S206-8-2), but at the time of a small win, the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 32. Before, the initial value is set to the "winning counter Vx" only once, and the "winning counter VX" is not reset in the subsequent opening / closing operation. That is, at the time of a big hit, the "winning counter Vx" measures the number of winning game balls to the variable prize device 32 in one opening / closing operation (special prize state), but at the time of a small hit, the variable prize device. The total number of winning game balls for 32 is to be measured.

  Now, following the setting process of the "winning counter Vx" in step S206-12, a small hit special prize state starting process is performed in step S206-13. The special winning state start processing at the time of small hit corresponds to the above-mentioned special prize state starting processing at the time of big hit when a small hit occurs. In the small hit special prize state start processing, the setting processing of the “first variable flag” and the “first variable timer” necessary for the opening / closing processing of the variable winning device 32 is performed, and the “xx open eye command” described later is executed. Settings are made. Here, the small prize winning special state start processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S206-13-1, the "first variable flag" is turned on. Then, the process proceeds to step S206-13-2, and 1 is added to the "opening counter". For example, in the first small hit special state start process at the time of small hit, 1 is added to the initial value (0) of the “open count counter” and the “open count counter” is updated to 1.

  After step S206-13-2, the process proceeds to step S206-13-3, and the setting process of the "first variable timer" is performed with reference to the opening / closing pattern control table (see FIG. 51). In step S206-13-3, the maximum opening time per opening / closing operation corresponding to the small hit is set in the "first variable timer". In the present embodiment, "100" is set in the "first variable timer", and the maximum opening time (specified time) per opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is set to "0.4 seconds". It

  After setting the "first variable timer", the process proceeds to step S206-13-4, and it is determined whether the "gaming state determination value Xj" is "1" or "3". Here, when the “game state determination value Xj” is “1” or “3” (S206-13-4: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-13-5, and the open eye stored in the ROM 502 is opened. The setting process of the "xx open eye command" is performed based on the command table (see FIG. 56 (a)) (note that "xx" is the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened after the small hit occurs, that is, , The value of the "opening counter" is substituted). After the setting of the "xx open eye command", this processing is ended.

  The "xx opening eye command" corresponds to the "xx round opening command" set at the time of a big hit, and is set only at the time of a small hit. Further, in the present embodiment, the “xx open eye command” has the same configuration as the “xx round open command”. In other words, the "xx opening eye command" is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is composed of information corresponding to the performance during opening, and the lower byte is the value of the "opening counter", that is, the number of times during the small hit. It is configured by information indicating whether the opening operation is performed (in the present embodiment, the value of the “opening number counter”). Further, since the “xx open eye command” has the same configuration as the “xx round open command”, the sub-control device 262 receives the control processing when the “xx open eye command” is received and the “xx round open command”. There is no difference in the control processing when the "release command" is received, and the same processing is performed. Furthermore, the "xx opening command" is set according to the number of times the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is opened. For example, the "1st opening command" is set for the first opening and the "opening command" is set for the second opening. Second release command "is set.

  It should be noted that the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between the “xx open-eye command” and the production during opening in a table, and when the sub-control device 262 receives the “xx open-eye command”, the display control device 45. By controlling, the effect corresponding to the received “xx open eye command” will be executed by the decorative symbol display device 42.

  In the setting process of the "xx opening eye command" in step S206-13-5, "BBxx" is set as the "xx opening eye command" because the "game state determination value Xj" is "1" or "3". It After the setting of the "xx open eye command", this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S206-13-4, that is, when the "gaming state determination value Xj" is "2" or "4", the process proceeds to step S206-13-6. “BCxx” is set as the “xx open eye command”. After the setting of the "xx open eye command", this processing is ended.

  Returning to FIG. 25, when a negative determination is made in step S206-11, or after the small hit special prize state start process of step S206-13, the process proceeds to step S206-14, and the small hitting variable winning device control process. I do. Next, the variable winning device control process at the time of small hit will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S206-14-1, the count value of the "first variable timer" is decremented by one.

  In a succeeding step S206-14-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the "winning counter Vx" is equal to or larger than the maximum winning number M1, that is, the total number of gaming balls won in the variable winning device 32 in the small hit state is the maximum winning number. It is determined whether or not the number has reached M1 (“10” in this embodiment). If an affirmative decision is made in step S206-14-2, the "first variable flag" is turned off in step S206-14-3, and the "small hitting end flag" in step S206-14-4. Is turned on, and further, the small hit end setting process of step S206-14-5, which will be described later, is performed and the present process is ended. That is, at the time of big hit, after the opening and closing operation is always performed a preset number of times in the variable winning device 32, the big hit state ends, but at the time of small hit, the number of winning game balls to the variable winning device 32 is maximum. Even if the open time of the variable winning device 32 remains at the stage where the number M1 of winning prizes is reached, or the number of remaining open times of the variable winning device 32 is not 0 (“remaining open number counter” is 0), It is configured to end the small hit state.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S206-14-2, that is, if the value of the "winning counter Vx" has not reached the maximum possible winning number M1, the process proceeds to step S206-14-6. It is determined whether the "1 variable flag" is on. If an affirmative determination is made here, that is, if the variable winning device 32 is in the open state, the processing in steps S206-14-7 to S206-14-10 is performed.

  More specifically, first, in step S206-14-7, whether or not the count value of the "first variable timer" is "0", that is, the opening time per opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 32b (in the present embodiment, It is determined whether "0.4 seconds") is left. If a negative determination is made in step S206-14-7, that is, if the timing for closing the variable winning a prize device 32 has not arrived yet, this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S206-14-7, that is, if it is the timing to close the variable winning device 32 (which is currently in the open state), the routine proceeds to step S206-14-8. , It is determined whether or not the counter value of the “remaining open number counter” is “0”, that is, whether or not the number of executions of the special prize state has reached a prescribed maximum number (2 times).

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S206-14-8, an open end setting process is carried out in step S206-14-9, and this process ends. In the opening end setting process of step S206-14-9, the "first variable flag" is turned off and the "small hit end flag" is turned on. As a result, the variable winning device 32 is closed and the process for ending the small hit state (S206-14-5) can be executed. The “small hit end flag” is state determination information used when determining the end of the small hit state in step S206-14-12.

  If a negative determination is made in step S206-14-8, that is, if the number of executions of the special prize state has not reached the specified maximum number, in step S206-14-10, the special prize feeding process at the time of small hit is performed, and The process ends. Next, the prize winning special prize processing will be described with reference to FIG. 32.

  First, in step S206-14-10-1, the "first variable flag" is turned off. As a result, the variable winning device 32 is closed. In addition, by turning off the "first variable flag", if it is a small hit state (S206-10: YES), a negative determination is made in step S206-14-6. That is, when the variable winning device 32 is in the open state (the "first variable flag" is on), the processing in steps S206-14-7 to S206-14-10 is performed, and the variable winning device 32 is If it is in the closed state (the "first variable flag" is off), the processes in steps S206-14-5 and steps S206-14-11 to S206-14-13 are performed.

  Returning to FIG. 32, after step S206-14-10-1, in step S206-14-10-2, the value of the “remaining open number counter” is decremented by 1. Subsequently, in step S206-14-10-3, the setting process of the "first variable timer" is performed. In step S206-14-10-3, whether or not a predetermined time has passed from the end of the prize state to the "first variable timer" (for example, whether a predetermined time has passed from the end of the small hit, a predetermined prize) In order to determine whether or not an interval from the end of the state to the start of the next prize state has passed), the open / close pattern control table (see FIG. 51) is taken into consideration and a predetermined value (for example, “1 second “250”) corresponding to “” is set.

  In step S206-14-10-4 following step S206-14-10-3, it is determined whether or not the "gaming state determination value Xj" is "1" or "3". Here, when the "gaming state determination value Xj" is "1" or "3" (S206-14-10-4: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-14-10-5 and is stored in the ROM 502. The setting processing of the "xx closing eye command" is performed based on the closed eye command table (see FIG. 56 (b)) (note that the variable winning device 32 after the small hit occurs in "xx"). The number of releases, that is, the value of the "opening counter" is substituted). After the setting of the "xx closing eye command", this processing is ended.

  The "xx closing eye command" corresponds to the "xx round closing command" set at the time of a big hit, and is set only at the time of a small hit. Further, in the present embodiment, the “xx closing eye command” has the same configuration as the “xx round closing command”. That is, the "xx closing eye command" is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is composed of information corresponding to the closing effect, and the lower byte is the value of the "opening number counter", that is, the number of times of the small hit. It is configured by information indicating whether the operation is a closing operation (in the present embodiment, the value of the “opening counter”). Further, since the "xx closing eye command" has the same configuration as the "xx round closing command", the sub-control device 262 receives the control processing when the "xx closing eye command" is received and the "xx round closing command". There is no difference from the control processing when the "close command" is received, and the same processing is performed. Furthermore, the "xx closing command" is set according to the number of times the variable winning device 32 is closed. For example, the "1st closing command" is set for the first closing, and the "2nd closing command" is set for the second closing. Is set.

  The sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between the "xx closing eye command" and the closing effect in a table, and when the sub-control device 262 receives the "xx closing eye command", the display control device 45 By controlling, the effect during closing corresponding to the received “xx closing eye command” will be executed by the decorative symbol display device 42.

  In the setting process of the "xx closing eye command" in step S206-14-10-5, since the "gaming state determination value Xj" is "1" or "3", "CBxx" is set as the "xx closing eye command". Is set. After the setting of the "xx closing eye command", this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S206-14-10-4, that is, when the “game state determination value Xj” is “2” or “4”, step S206-14-10-6 Then, “CCxx” is set as the “xx closing eye command”. After the setting of the "xx closing eye command", this processing is ended.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when the "small hit" is achieved, similar to the "2R probability variation big hit" and the like, the decorative symbol display device 42 alternately performs the opening effect and the closing effect. As a result, a series of small hitting performances (in which it is impossible or difficult to distinguish between open performances and closed performances) is executed.

  For example, the sub-control device 262, which has received “BBxx” as the “xx opening eye command” and “CBxx” as the “xx closing eye command”, controls the display control device 45 to cause the decorative symbol display device 42. In the display section 42a of, for example, the following small hitting effect is performed. That is, the effect during the small hit at this time is, for example, as shown in FIG. 74, an effect executed immediately before the ending effect indicating the transition to the “latent probability effect mode”, such as the “normal effect mode”. In the case of "2R probability variation big hit" or the like, the same effect as the "big hit medium effect".

  In addition, the sub-control device 262 which receives “BCxx” as the “xx opening eye command” and “CCxx” as the “xx closing eye command” controls the display control device 45 to thereby display the decorative symbol display device 42. In the display section 42a of, for example, the following small hitting effect is performed. That is, the effect during the small hit at this time is, for example, as shown in FIG. 79, an effect executed immediately before the ending effect indicating the transition to the “time saving effect mode”, and in the “probable variation effect mode” or the like. This is the same effect as the "big hit medium effect" when "2R short-time big hit" or the like occurs.

  In the present embodiment, the lower 4 bits of the upper byte are common information in the set "xx opening eye command" and "xx closing eye command" (for example, "xx opening eye command"). When “BCxx” is set as the “command” and “CCxx” is set as the “xx closing command, the lower 4 bits“ C ”of the upper byte are common”. Therefore, in the initial small hit special state starting process at the time of small hit, the common information is acquired by performing the case classification process (S206-13-4), and the subsequent "xx open eye command" and " When setting the "xx closed eye command", the acquired common information may be used without performing the case classification processing (S206-13-4, S206-14-10-4). In this case, the processing load can be reduced.

  Returning to FIG. 31, when a negative determination is made in step S206-14-6, the flow proceeds to step S206-14-11, and it is determined whether or not the value of the "first variable timer" is "0". To do. In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S206-14-6, that is, when the “first variable flag” is off, the value of the “first variable timer” becomes the remaining time of the interval time. There is. Therefore, the process of step S206-14-11 is, so to speak, a process of determining whether or not it is within a predetermined time after the end of the special prize state (within a predetermined time after the end of winning or during an interval between the special prize states).

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S206-14-11, that is, a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the prize state, and the timing to move to the next process (start of the next prize state or start of the ending effect) is reached. If so, the process proceeds to step S206-14-12. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S206-14-11, this processing is ended as it is.

  In step S206-14-12, it is determined whether or not to end the small hit state by taking into consideration the "small hit end flag". When a negative determination is made in step S206-14-12, a small hit special state start process is performed in step S206-14-13, and then this process is ended. The special winning state start processing at the time of small hit in step S206-14-13 is the same as the processing in step S206-13.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S206-14-12, after the small hit end setting process is performed in step S206-14-5, the present process is ended.

  In the small hit end setting process of step S206-14-5, the "small hit middle flag" and the "small hit end flag" are turned off, and the "gaming state notification command", "ending command", "return counter", The setting process of the “return flag” and the “return process suggestion command” is performed.

  In addition, the "return process suggestion command" means to perform "return process suggestion production" that suggests execution of "return process (return production)" in the decorative pattern display device 42 during normal fluctuation after the small hit state, It is output to the sub control device 262. The "return process suggestion effect" is performed to instruct the player that the "return process (return effect)" is executed. In the "return process suggestion effect", for example, an effect such as a display of a predetermined display object (for example, a character or the like) that does not appear in the normal "time saving effect mode" is performed on the decorative symbol display device 42. In the decorative symbol display device 42, the function of the main control device 261 for setting the "return process suggestion command" and the display control device 45 when the "return process suggestion command" is received are controlled. The function of the sub-control device 262 that causes the "return process suggestion effect" and the decorative pattern display device 42 that performs the "return process suggestion effect" constitute the second information transmitting means.

  Next, the "small hitting end setting process" in step S206-14-5 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S206-14-5-1, it is determined whether or not the "high probability mode" by referring to the "lottery mode flag". Then, if an affirmative decision is made in step S206-14-5-1, then the flow shifts to step S206-14-5-2, and it is decided whether or not the "gaming state decision value Xj" is "4". To do. That is, it is determined whether or not the current production mode is the “probable variation production mode”.

  Here, when the "game state determination value Xj" is set to "4" (S206-14-5-2: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-14-5-3, and "return flag". To turn on. When the "return flag" is turned on, that is, when the "small hit" occurs in the state where the effect mode is the "probability variation effect mode", the appearance mode is temporarily "high probability mode" in appearance. It is set to the "time saving effect mode" in which it is difficult to determine whether or not However, as described above, the return process is executed after the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times, and the process returns to the “probability variation effect mode” that clearly indicates the “high probability mode”.

  Succeedingly, in a step S206-14-5-4, a "return counter" setting process is performed. As described above, the “return counter” is a numerical value that defines the timing of the return processing to the “probability variation effect mode”. After the "return flag" is set, when the same number of variable displays as the "return counter" are displayed, the return processing (S205-16-8) is executed, and the return to the "probability variation effect mode" occurs. Will be done.

  Further, as the initial value of the "return counter", a value based on a counter (a random number counter C1, a big hit type determination counter C2, a reach selection counter C3, etc.) used when the main control device 261 performs processing is set. . In the present embodiment, for example, a value obtained by adding "1" to the numerical value stored in the jackpot type determination counter buffer (the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2) is set as the initial value of the "return counter". That is, any one of "1 to 50" is randomly set as the "return counter". The initial value of the "return counter" may be set based on another counter such as the hit random number counter C1 or the reach selection counter C3. In addition, a predetermined numerical value may be set as the initial value of the "return counter". In addition, it is preferable to set the initial value of the “return counter” to a value equal to or less than the number of continuations (100 times) of the “high support mode” in the “time saving mode”. For example, the initial value of the "return counter" is set to the same number as the number of continuations of the "high support mode" in the "time saving mode", and the "return effect" is set at the same timing as the transition to the "normal effect mode" in the "time saving mode". May be executed to return to the “probability variation effect mode”.

  After step S206-14-5-4, in step S206-14-5-5, whether or not the value of the "winning counter Vx" is 1 or more, that is, in the small hit state, the game for the variable winning device 32. It is determined whether or not a ball has been won. Here, if the value of the "winning counter Vx" is 1 or more (S206-14-5-5: YES), the "return processing suggestion command" is set in step S206-14-5-6, The process moves to step S206-14-5-7. On the other hand, when the value of the "winning counter Vx" is less than 1 (S206-14-5-5: NO), the "return processing suggestion command" is not set, and the step S206-14-5 is performed. Move to 7. In other words, the winning of the game ball to the variable winning device 32 in the small hit state brings not only the acquisition of the game ball but also the benefit of confirming the execution of the "return process suggestion effect" after the small hit to the player, and the "return process suggestion" By confirming the execution of the "production", the player can recognize the return to the "probability change production mode" before the execution of the return processing.

  In the following step S206-14-5-7, the "ending command" is set. The “ending command” is set based on the ending command table (see FIG. 55). Specifically, the "ending command" is selected from the ending command table on the basis of the "gaming state determination value Xj" and the "lottery mode flag" and the various "big hit flag" and "small hit prize flag". In step S206-14-5-7, since the "gaming state determination value Xj" is "4" and the "small hit prize flag" is on, "EC" is set as the "ending command". . When "EC" is set as the "ending command", as in the case of "2R hour / hour jackpot" in the "probability variation effect mode", the "time saving corresponding ending effect" is displayed on the display section 42a of the decorative pattern display device 42. Will be executed.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S206-14-5-8, and "2" is set as the "game state determination value Xj". That is, when a "small hit" occurs in the "probability variation effect mode", the effect mode after the small hit is set to the "time saving effect mode". Then, in step S206-14-5-9, the "game state notification command" is set. Next, in step S206-14-5-10, the "small hit prize flag" is turned off, and this processing ends.

  If the "gaming state determination value Xj" is not "4" in step S206-14-5-2 (S206-14-5-2: NO), the process proceeds to step S206-14-5-11. It is determined whether or not the “game state determination value Xj” is “3”, that is, whether or not the current production mode is the “latent probability production mode”. If an affirmative decision is made in step S206-14-5-11, then the flow shifts to step S206-14-5-12, and an "ending command" is set based on the ending command table. In step S206-14-5-12, since the "gaming state determination value Xj" is "3" and the "small hit prize flag" is on, "EB" is set as the "ending command". . After that, after the setting of the "game state notification command" in step S206-14-5-9 and the turning off of the "small hit prize flag" in step S206-14-5-10, this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if the "game state determination value Xj" is not "3" in step S206-14-5-11 (S206-14-5-11: NO), that is, the effect mode is "time saving effect mode" ("game" When the state determination value Xj "= 2) and the" high probability mode ", the process proceeds to step S206-14-5-13. Then, in step S206-14-5-13, "ending command" is set based on the ending command table. Here, since the "gaming state determination value Xj" is "2", the "high probability mode" is set, and the "small hit prize flag" is on, "EC" is set as the "ending command". It After that, after the setting of the "game state notification command" in step S206-14-5-9 and the turning off of the "small hit prize flag" in step S206-14-5-10, this processing is ended.

  Now, if a negative determination is made in step S206-14-5-1, that is, if a small hit occurs in the "low probability mode", the process proceeds to step S206-14-5-14, and It is determined whether or not the state determination value Xj "is" 1 "or" 3 ".

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S206-14-5-14, then the flow shifts to step S206-14-5-15, and an "ending command" is set based on the ending command table. Here, since the "gaming state determination value Xj" is "1" or "3", the "low probability mode" is set, and the "small hit prize flag" is on, "EB" is set as the "ending command". Is set. Furthermore, in step S206-14-5-16, the "game state determination value Xj" is set to "3". That is, the effect mode from the time of the next change is set to the “latent probability effect mode”. After that, after the setting of the "game state notification command" in step S206-14-5-9 and the turning off of the "small hit prize flag" in step S206-14-5-10, this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S206-14-5-14, the process proceeds to step S206-14-5-17, and the "ending command" is set to "EC". After that, after the setting of the "game state notification command" in step S206-14-5-9 and the turning off of the "small hit prize flag" in step S206-14-5-10, this processing is ended.

  In the above-mentioned "small hitting end setting process" (S206-14-5), unlike the "big hitting end setting process" (S206-9-11), the value of the "lottery mode flag" is not changed. , The value of the “lottery mode flag” when the small hit occurs is maintained as it is. In other words, when the winning result is obtained by the second winning / boring lottery (when a “small hit” occurs), the first winning probability when the winning result is obtained is maintained as it is. For example, when the "high probability mode" is set before the small hit state occurs (when the flag value of the "lottery mode flag" is "53"), the "high probability mode" remains unchanged after the small hit ends. (The value of the lottery mode flag is “53”) is maintained.

  Based on the on / off state of the "first variable flag", various control signals are output to the variable winning device 32 in the next external output process of the normal process. When the "first variable flag" is on, a control signal for opening the special winning opening 32a is output to the variable winning device 32, and the special winning opening 32a is opened. On the other hand, when the "first variable flag" is off, a control signal for closing the special winning opening 32a is output to the variable winning device 32, and the special winning opening 32a is closed.

  Further, in the variable winning device control process, when a big hit occurs, the special jackpot time special prize feed process in step S206-9-7, the open end setting process in step S206-9-6, and step S206-8, step S206-. In the jackpot special prize state start processing of 9-10, the "first variable flag" is alternately switched. As a result, during the big hit, the opening / closing process in the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly performed until the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened reaches the specified number (2 times, 8 times, or 16 times).

  On the other hand, when a small hit occurs, normally, the small prize winning special prize feed processing in step S206-14-10, the opening end setting processing in step S206-14-9, and step S206-13 and step S206-. In the prize winning state start processing of 14-13, the "first variable flag" is alternately switched. As a result, during the small hit, the opening / closing process in the variable winning device 32 is normally repeated until the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened reaches the maximum number (2 times) defined above. However, the opening and closing of the variable winning device 32 is forcibly ended when the total winning number of the game balls to the variable winning device 32 in the small hit state is equal to or more than the maximum winning number M1.

  In addition, the "opening command" set in the above-described variation end setting process (S205-16), and the "xx round opening command (xx opening eye command)" set in the variable winning device control process (S206), The "xx round closing command (xx closing eye command)", the "ending command", and the "gaming state determination value Xj" after the hit ends are shown in FIG. 57 in each "gaming state determination value Xj" and "lottery mode". As shown in. In FIG. 57, "opening command", "xx round opening command (xx opening command)", "xx round closing command (xx closing command)", "ending command" and "game state determination" set after hitting Values Xj ”are shown in this order.

  That is, when the "game state determination value Xj" is "1" (when the production mode is the "normal production mode", or the "game state determination value Xj" is "3" (the production mode is " When the "2R probability variable jackpot", "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit" occurs when the lottery mode is "low probability mode", the same "Opening command", "xx round opening command (xx opening eye command)", "xx round closing command (xx closing eye command)", "ending command" and "game state determination value Xj" are set. In this case, the "support mode flag" is changed or maintained to the "low support mode", and the symbols displayed at the time of fluctuation stop are the same (combination of special symbols). It is.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), after the same stop symbol is displayed, the "latent probability corresponding opening effect", the "latent probability corresponding jackpot effect" and the "latent probability corresponding ending effect" are performed, Next, the "low support mode" is added to the "latent probability effect mode". Therefore, the player determines whether the lottery mode is the “high-probability mode” (whether the “2R probability variation big hit” has occurred) from the effects such as the opening effect, the effect mode after the end of the hit, and the stop pattern at the time of hit. It is not possible to determine whether the mode is the "low probability mode" (whether "2R normal big hit" or "small hit" has occurred).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 57, when the “game state determination value Xj” is “4” (the production mode is the “probability variation production mode”), or the “game state determination value Xj” is “2”. Yes (when the production mode is "time saving production mode") and when the lottery mode is "high probability mode", when "2R time reduction jackpot", "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit" occurs Are the same "opening command", "xx round opening command (xx opening command)", "xx round closing command (xx closing command)", "ending command" and "gaming state determination value Xj", respectively. To be done. Further, in this case, the "support mode flag" is maintained in the "high support mode", and the symbols displayed at the time of the variable stop are the same (combination of prescribed symbols).

  Therefore, the lottery mode is maintained at the “high probability mode” when the “small hit” occurs, while the lottery mode is the “low probability mode” when the “2R time / short jackpot” or the “2R normal big hit” occurs. However, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), during the "small hit" and the "2R short time big hit" and the like, as shown in FIG. There is no difference in the stop symbols, and they are the same. Further, in the present embodiment, when the “2R short-time big hit” or the like occurs, the remaining number of fluctuations to which the “high support mode” is given is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and when the “small hit” occurs, the decorative symbol is displayed. The display device 42 displays dummy information in the same manner as the remaining number of fluctuations. Therefore, the player cannot determine whether the lottery mode is the “high-probability mode” or the “low-probability mode” on the basis of the opening effect and the like and the effect mode when the player changes.

  However, in the case of shifting to the "time saving effect mode" due to a big hit such as "2R time saving big hit", if the jackpot is not won, a "normal effect mode" is displayed after a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present embodiment) of variable display. However, when the game shifts to the “time-saving effect mode” due to a small hit, the return effect is executed and then the “probability variation effect mode” is returned to.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 57, when "2R normal big hit" or "small hit" occurs, the same "opening command" and "xx round opening command (xx opening eye command)" in each effect mode, respectively. , "Xx round closing command (xx closing eye command)", "ending command" and "game state determination value Xj" are set. Further, the symbols displayed when the fluctuation is stopped are also the same (combination of prescribed symbols). On the other hand, when the "2R normal big hit" occurs, the lottery mode shifts (falls) to the "low probability mode", but when the "small hit" occurs, the current lottery mode is maintained. Therefore, for example, in the "latent probability effect mode" of the "high probability mode", when "2R normal big hit" or "small hit" occurs, the lottery mode after hit is maintained in the "high probability mode". It is not possible to visually judge whether or not the shift is made to the “low probability mode”. Therefore, the player can expect to maintain the “high-probability mode”, and can enjoy the unprecedented fun while fluttering around. In this respect, the interest can be dramatically improved.

  Now, returning to the normal process of FIG. 10, following the variable winning control process of step S206, a second display control process is executed in step S207. In this process, what kind of control is to be performed in the normal symbol display device 41 is set and the control contents of the ordinary symbol display device 41 are set. Next, the second display control process of step S207 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S207-1, whether or not the normal symbol display device 41 is in the variable display by observing the setting state of the "second display flag" indicating whether or not the normal symbol display device 41 is in the variable display. Determine whether or not. More specifically, when the "second display flag" is on, it is considered that the normal symbol display device 41 is in the variable display, and when the "second display flag" is off, the normal symbol display is displayed. It is considered that the device 41 is performing the stop display, which is a state in which the variable display is stopped.

  When a negative determination is made in step S207-1, the process proceeds to step S207-2, and it is determined whether or not the value of the normal suspension counter Nc is greater than 0. At this time, if the value of the ordinary holding counter Nc is 0, this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the variable display is not being performed and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is larger than "0", the process proceeds to step S207-3. In step S207-3, 1 is subtracted from the normal holding counter Nc. In a succeeding step S207-4, a process of shifting the data stored in the normal fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the normal variable holding area to the execution area side, and the holding first area → the execution area, the holding second area → The data in each area is shifted such as the first reserved area, the third reserved area → the second reserved area, the fourth reserved area → the third reserved area.

  Then, in step S207-5, start setting processing is executed. In this process, a process indicating that the condition for performing variable display on the normal symbol display device 41 is satisfied is performed. Specifically, the "second display flag" is turned on and the "second display timer" setting process is performed. The "second display timer" is a means for measuring the variation time (remaining time) of the variation display performed by the normal symbol display device 41, and determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation display. Is taken into consideration when doing.

  In the present embodiment, during the "low support mode", the variation time of the variation display performed by the normal symbol display device 41 is set to 2 seconds. Therefore, in consideration of the “support mode flag”, when the “low support mode” is set, “500” is set in the “second display timer”. Further, in the "high support mode", the variation time of the variation display performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is set to 0.4 seconds. Therefore, in consideration of the “support mode flag”, when the “high support mode” is set, “100” is set in the “second display timer”. Then, after step S207-5 ends, the second display control process ends.

  Based on the setting in the start setting process, in the external output process of the next normal process, when the control signal to start the variable display to the normal symbol display device 41 is output, it changes in the normal symbol display device 41 The display starts. As described above, the normal symbol display device 41 is configured to light up and display "○" or "x" as a normal symbol.

  Now, if the affirmative determination is made in step S207-1, that is, if the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display, the process proceeds to step S207-6, and the second display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed once, the count value of the "second display timer" is decremented by 1.

  Succeedingly, in a step S207-7, it is determined whether or not the count value of the “second display timer” is “0”, that is, whether or not the variation time has elapsed. When a positive determination is made in step S207-7, the "second display flag" is turned off in step S207-8, and the normal symbol stop for performing stop display on the normal symbol display device 41 in step S207-9. Make display settings. Then, based on the setting content of the normal symbol stop display setting, in the external output process in the next normal process, a control signal to the effect that stop display is output to the normal symbol display device 41. That is, in the case of winning, the “◯” symbol (winning symbol) is stopped and displayed (for example, lit only for a few seconds), and in the case of being out, the “x” symbol is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, as described above, it is determined whether or not to win based on the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal fluctuation holding area. Specifically, among the numerical values 0 to 9 of the normal symbol random number counter C4, the winning value is one "0" in the "low support mode" and eight "0 to 7" in the "high support mode". Is.

  After the normal symbol stop display setting in step S207-9, the process proceeds to step S207-10, the variation end setting process is performed, and the present process is terminated. In the variation process setting process, when the stop display corresponds to winning, the setting process for performing the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 37 is performed. Specifically, the “second variable flag” is turned on and the opening time is set in the “second variable timer”.

  The "second variable flag" is state determination information for determining whether or not the electric accessory 37 is in the open state.

  The “second variable timer” is a means for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the electric accessory 37, and is taken into consideration when determining whether or not the specified time has elapsed from the start of opening. In the present embodiment, the opening time of the electric accessory 37 is different between the “high support mode” and the “low support mode”, and “1000” is set for the second variable timer in the “high support mode”. Then, in the "low support mode", "100" is set to the second variable timer.

  By the way, when a negative determination is made in step S207-7, in step S207-11, the switching display setting for continuously performing the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 is set, and this processing is ended. Then, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, in the external output processing in the next normal processing, a control signal for switching display is output to the normal symbol display device 41. Specifically, if the current lighting is “◯”, the display is switched to “×”, and if “x”, the display is switched to “◯”. Thereby, the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized at the timing of the second display control process, that is, every 4 msec.

  Returning to FIG. 10, after the second display control process of step S207 ends, the process proceeds to step S208, and the electric accessory control process is executed. In this process, the control content of the electric accessory 37 is set as to what kind of control is performed in the electric accessory 37. Next, the electric accessory control process of step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S208-1, it is determined whether or not the "second variable flag" indicating whether or not the electric accessory 37 is in the open state is on. If it is determined here that the "second variable flag" is not on (the electric accessory 37 is in the closed state), the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made in step S208-1, that is, when the "second variable flag" is on, it is considered that the electric accessory 37 is in the open state, and the second variable timer subtraction is performed in step S208-2. Perform processing. The value of the "second variable timer" is decremented by 1 each time this process is performed once.

  Then, the process proceeds to step S208-3, in which the value of the "second variable timer" after the subtraction is taken into consideration to determine whether or not the specified opening time has elapsed. Here, when the specified opening time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the "second variable timer" becomes "0", an affirmative decision is made in step S208-3. When a negative determination is made here, this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S208-3, then the flow shifts to step S208-4, where end setting processing is carried out in step S208-4, and then this processing is ended. In the end setting process of step S208-4, a process of turning off the "second variable flag" is performed.

  Based on the on / off state of the “second variable flag”, various control signals are output to the electric accessory 37 in the next external output process of the normal process. When the "second variable flag" is on, a control signal for opening the movable blade 37a is output to the electric accessory 37, and the electric accessory 37 is opened. On the other hand, when the "second variable flag" is off, a control signal for closing the movable blade 37a is output to the electric accessory 37, and the electric accessory 37 is closed. This makes it impossible to win the game ball to the lower start winning port 33B.

  Returning to FIG. 10, following the electric accessory control process of step S208, it is determined in step S209 whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if the power-off occurrence information is not set in the backup area 503a, it is determined in step S210 whether the next normal processing execution timing has been reached, that is, a predetermined time from the start of the previous normal processing (this embodiment). Then, it is determined whether 4 msec) has elapsed. Then, if the predetermined time has already elapsed, the process proceeds to step S201, and the processes of step S201 and subsequent steps are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous normal processing, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal processing. Repeatedly executed (step S211, step S212).

  That is, in step S211, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the upper limit value (398 in this example).

  In step S212, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (similar to step S202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the upper limit values (198 and 240 in this example), they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the changed values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S209 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the random number counter C1 per hit) can be updated randomly, and similarly changes. The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated at random.

  Now, if the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S209: YES), it means that the power supply has been cut off. Therefore, the processing after step S213 is performed as the power failure processing at the time of power-off. Be seen. In the power failure process, first, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S213, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area in step S214, and the stack pointer value is saved in the backup area 503a in step S215. Remember. Then, in step S216, a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to another control device (payout control device 311 or the like). Then, in step S217, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. After that, the RAM access is prohibited in step S218, and the endless loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

  The processing of step S209 is the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in steps S201 to S208, or the end of one cycle of the processing of steps S211 and S212 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at the timing. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main control device 261, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the end of each processing, the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is smaller than in the case where each processing is in the middle. And can be stored easily. Further, when returning to the state before power-off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the main control device 261 can be reduced. . Furthermore, since the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited before the data is stored (step S213), it is possible to prevent the data from being changed when the power is cut off, and it is possible to reliably store the state before the power is cut off. .

  Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of description, the reception interrupt processing will be described first with reference to FIG. 36, and then the main processing will be described with reference to FIG. 37. In the drawings, the processes performed by the payout control device 311 are denoted by reference numerals starting from S5.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the reception interrupt processing executed by the payout control device 311. The reception interrupt process is a process executed by interrupting when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, another process executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is once put on standby, and the reception interrupt process is executed. When the reception interrupt processing is executed, first, in order to store the command transmitted from the main control device 261 in the command buffer of the RAM 513 in step S501 and to store the fact that the command is transmitted from the main control device 261 in step S502. The "command reception flag" is turned on, and this reception interrupt processing ends. As described above, when the command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referred to and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is stored in order to store the next received command in the next storage area. Will be updated.

  In the present embodiment, the reception process of the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is assumed to be the interrupt process executed when the command is received. In the timer interrupt processing, it is confirmed whether or not a command is received before the command determination processing (step S551) is performed, and if the command is received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513. The “command reception flag” may be turned on and the process may shift to the command determination process when no command is received. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not the command is received by confirming the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port at every predetermined interval.

  Next, the main processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the payout control device 311. This main processing is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

  First, in step S511, an initialization process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value and the interrupt mode is set. Then, the RAM access is permitted in step S512, and the external interrupt vector is set in step S513.

  After that, in step S514, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Then, if the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a, a RAM determination value is calculated in step S515, and in the subsequent step S516, the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved when the power was turned off. No, that is, the validity of the backup is determined. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 513. Note that it is also possible to judge the validity of the backup depending on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 513 is correctly stored.

  If the power failure occurrence information is not set in step S514 (S514: NO), or if the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) in step S516 (S516: NO). , And proceeds to the initialization processing of the RAM 513 after step S523.

  In step S523, the entire area of RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S524, the initial value of RAM 513 is set. After that, in step S525, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and the process proceeds to step S522 to permit the interrupt.

  On the other hand, on the condition that the power failure information is set in step S514 and the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal in step S516 (S514: YES, S516: YES), Execute the processing when power is supplied (processing when power is restored). That is, in step S517, the stack pointer before power-off is returned, in step S518 the power-off occurrence information is cleared, and in step S519, the “payout permission flag” that permits payout of prize balls is cleared. In step S520, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and in step S521, the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Further, in step S522, interruption is permitted.

  After the interrupt is permitted in step S522, it is determined in step S526 whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the power-off occurrence information is set, it means that the power supply has been cut off, and therefore, the processing after step S527 is performed as a power failure processing at the time of power-off. In the power failure process, first, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S527, and the command determination process is executed in next step S528.

  Next, the command determination process will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a command determination process performed by the payout control device 311. In the command determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the "command reception flag" is turned on in step S528-1. The “command reception flag” is turned on when the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received in the reception interrupt process (see FIG. 36) described above.

  If it is determined in step S528-1 that the "command reception flag" is off (S528-1: NO), since a new command has not been received from main controller 261, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S528-1 that the "command reception flag" is on (S528-1: YES), the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S528-2, and "command reception" is performed in step S528-3. Turn off the flag. By turning off the "command reception flag" in step S528-3, the processing of steps S528-2 to S528-11 can be skipped until a new command is received, so the control load of the payout control device 311 is reduced. You can also

  In the processing of steps S528-4 to S528-6, the type of command read from the RAM 513 is determined. In step S528-4, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a “payout initialization command”, and in step S528-5 it is determined whether or not the command is a “payout return command”. In S528-6, it is determined whether or not the command is a "prize ball command".

  If the command transmitted from main controller 261 is the "payout initialization command", it is determined in step S528-7 whether or not the "payout permission flag" is already turned on, and the "payout permission flag" is turned off. If so (S528-7: NO), it means that initialization of the RAM 513 is instructed from the main control device 261 when the power is turned on. Therefore, in step S528-8, a work area (area) other than the stack area of the RAM 513. Is cleared to 0, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S528-9. Then, in step S528-11, the "payout permission flag" is turned on, and the payout permission of the prize ball is set.

  As described above, the main control device 261 performs the initialization processing (steps S112 and S113) of the RAM 503 after transmitting the “payout initialization command” (step S111), and the payout control device 311 causes the “payout initialization command”. Since the initialization processing (steps S528-8 and S528-9) of the RAM 513 is performed after receiving the "initialization command" (step S528-4), the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the RAM 513 are initialized. The timing is almost the same. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives the command transmitted from the main control device 261 due to the deviation of the initialization timing, the RAM 513 is initialized and the control corresponding to the received command cannot be performed. It is possible to prevent the harmful effects of. Further, since the "payout permission flag" is turned on after the RAM 513 has been initialized, it is possible to reliably set the awarding payout of prize balls.

  On the other hand, if the "payout permission flag" is already turned on in step S528-7, the command determination process is ended without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and the initialization process of the RAM 513. That is, the process of step S528-7 prohibits the RAM 513 from being initialized with the "payout permission flag" set. The “payout initialization command” is a command that is transmitted only when the initialization processing of the payout control device 311 is performed when the power is turned on, such as when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on. There is no reception with the "payout permission flag" turned on, and in such a case, it is considered that the payout control device 311 recognized it as a "payout initialization command" due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the work area of the RAM 513 is cleared (step S528-8) and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set (step S528-9) while the "payout permission flag" is turned on, a prize ball remains. In such a case, a bad effect such as not being paid out occurs and the player is lost, but since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the "payout permission flag" is turned on, the player is prevented from being initialized. It can prevent giving a loss.

  If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a “payout return command” (S528-4: NO, S528-5: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 are in the state before the power is cut off. Since the game is to be returned, the "payout permission flag" is turned on in step S528-11 to permit the payout of prize balls. That is, when there is power-off occurrence information and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power-off, the payout of prize balls is permitted. When the "payout permission flag" is turned on in the process of step S528-11, it means that the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer has been completed, so that the read pointer is moved to the next storage area. It is updated to the corresponding read pointer.

  Furthermore, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a "prize ball command" (S528-5: NO, step S528-6: YES), the number of prize balls received is calculated in step S528-10. The “payout permission flag” is turned on in step S528-11 in order to store the added number and store it, and to permit the payout of prize balls. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads the “prize balls command” stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and determines the number of prize balls corresponding to the command as the total prize ball number stored in the predetermined buffer area. Is added to and stored. Since the prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls are paid out based on the “prize ball command” transmitted from the main control device 261, the “prize ball command” is a payout instruction command for instructing the payout of prize balls. . Further, when the "prize ball command" is received, the payout permission is set immediately, so that the prize ball can be paid out early for the winning. When the "payout permission flag" is turned on in the process of step S528-11, it means that the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer has ended, so the read pointer corresponds to the next storage area. The read pointer is updated.

  The command transmitted from the main control device 261 is neither the “payout initialization command” (S528-4: NO), the “payout return command” (step S528-5: NO), or the “prize ball command”. If not (step S528-6: NO), the command determination process is terminated without turning on the “payout permission flag”.

  Returning to FIG. 37, following the command determination process of step S528, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area in step S529, and the stack pointer value is stored in the backup area 513a in step S530. In step S531, the RAM judgment value is calculated and stored in the backup area 513a. In step S532, the RAM access is prohibited, and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 513 that are backed up.

  In the process of step S526, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed after the process performed when the power is turned on, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is smaller than that in the case where each process is in progress. It is low and can be stored easily. Further, when returning to the state before power-off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

  Next, the timer interrupt processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The timer interrupt process is activated periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In the timer interrupt process, first, in step S551, a command from the main control device 261 is acquired, and the command determination process is performed. The command determination process is the same process as step S528 described above.

  When the command determination process ends, it is determined in step S552 whether or not the "payout permission flag" is turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the "payout permission flag" is not turned on, this processing is ended as it is. That is, it is possible to prevent the prize balls from being paid out before the command is transmitted from the main control device 261.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S552, firing permission is set for the firing control device 312 in step S553, the state return switch 321 is checked in step S554, and the state is returned if it is decided that the state return operation has started. Execute the return operation. By this processing, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error occurs such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor, the dispensing motor is rotated in the forward and reverse directions to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state). .

  Then, in step S555, the lower plate full tank state or the lower plate full tank release state is set according to the change in the state of the lower plate 15. That is, when the lower plate 15 is full, the lower plate 15 is judged to be full, and when the lower plate is full, the lower plate full state is set and when the lower plate is no longer full. , Set the lower plate full tank release status. Further, in step S556, the tank ball-free state (ball-out state) or the tank-ball-free state (ball present state) is set according to the change in the state of the tank ball. That is, the tank sphere no-state is determined by the detection signal of the tank sphere no switch, the tank sphere no state is set when the tank sphere is no longer present, and the tank sphere no release state is set when the tank sphere is no longer present. Execute the setting.

  After that, in step S557, it is determined whether or not there is a state to be notified, such as an error state, and if there is a state to be notified, the state is notified.

  Subsequently, a payout control process for prize balls and lent balls is executed. Specifically, the payout amount setting process is performed in step S558, the motor control state acquisition process is performed in step S559, and the motor drive process is performed in step S560.

  In step S561, the state return switch 321 is checked to perform the ball-shedding process by driving the payout motor 358a on condition that the ball-shedding is not disabled and the ball-shedding operation is not started. In a succeeding step S562, the control of the vibrator 360 (vibration motor control) is executed on condition that the ball is in a clogged state. Then, the process returns to the beginning of this timer interrupt process.

  Next, a normal process of the sub control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. In the drawings, the processes in the sub control device 262 are denoted by reference numerals starting from S7.

  First, in step S701, the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received.

  If the command is received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 in step S702. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores a command transmitted from the main control device 261.

  The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area, and when commands are stored in all storage areas, the storage area It is configured to return to the beginning and update the command. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

  In the following step S703, command determination processing is performed. Here, the command determination process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S703-1, the received command is read from the command buffer of the RAM 553. In the following step S703-2, the type of the command is determined.

  If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is an "initialization command", it means that the main control device 261 has instructed the initialization of the RAM 553 when the power is turned on. Therefore, the RAM 553 is cleared in step S703-3. The initial value of the RAM 553 is set in step S703-4. As a result, the value “1” of the “game state determination value Xj” corresponding to the “normal effect mode” that is the initial setting is stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 553. After that, this processing ends.

  If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a "return command", the main control device 261 will return to the state before the power-off, so the sub control device 262 without the backup function will execute the step S703-5. Then, the value (one of "1" to "4") of the "game state determination value Xj" included in the return command is read out and stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 553. After that, this processing ends.

  Further, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a "game state notification command", as in the case where the transmitted command is a "return command", the "game state notification" is issued in step S703-5. The "game state determination value Xj" included in the "command" is read out and stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 553. After that, this processing ends.

  If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is the "hold control command", various information (big hit determination information, big hit type information, start winning opening 33A, etc.) included in the "hold control command" in step S703-6. 33B) A storing process of storing information indicating which winning display is the variation display triggered by the winning) is stored in the sub variation holding area, and this process is finished.

  The sub fluctuation reservation area is provided corresponding to the special fluctuation reservation area of main controller 261. That is, the sub variation holding area includes a first sub variation holding area corresponding to the upper starting winning opening 33A, a second sub variation holding area corresponding to the lower starting winning opening 33B, and one sub execution area. Each of the four sub-variable holding areas includes four holding areas (holding first to holding fourth areas).

  In each hold area, the reception history (reception order) of the "hold control command" and the winning history of the game balls included in the "hold control command" (starting winning opening 33A or 33B is based on the winning of the prize) Etc.), information (big hit determination information, big hit type information, etc.) related to the variable display executed by the decorative pattern display device 42 is stored in time series. As a result, the sub control device 262 can grasp the number of pending display of variable display and its contents.

  If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is the "symbol command", the symbol setting process is performed in step S703-7, and this process is terminated.

  In the symbol setting process of step S703-7, based on the hit type information stored in the holding area of the sub-variation holding area, the symbols stored in the counter buffer (see FIG. 44) of the RAM 553 described later are displayed as decorative symbols. As a stop symbol to be stopped and displayed on the device 42, it is set in the sub execution area.

  More specifically, when "B1" is set in the "symbol command", a combination of symbols of any one of 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9 is determined as a stop symbol. On the other hand, when "B2" is set in the "symbol command", the combination of any of the ditches of 0, 2, 4, 6, 8 is determined as the stop symbol. Further, when "B3" is set in the "symbol command", the combination of the symbols stored in the front / back outreach symbol buffer is determined as the stopped symbol. When "B4" is set in the "symbol command", the combination of the symbols stored in the reach symbol buffer other than the front / rear deviation is determined as the stop symbol. When "B5" is set in the "symbol command", the combination of the symbols stored in the completely-off symbol buffer is determined as the stopped symbol. When "B6" is set in the "symbol command", a combination of symbols in which a special symbol is displayed in the middle symbol display area of the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined as a stop symbol. When "B7" is set in the "symbol command", the combination of the prescribed symbols is determined as the stopped symbol. In addition, when "B6" is set in the "symbol command", the symbol displayed in the upper symbol display area and the symbol displayed in the lower symbol display area are the front and rear reach reach symbol buffers by the sub-control device 262. Or, the symbols in the upper symbol display area and the symbols in the lower symbol display area symbols stored in the reach symbol buffer other than the front / rear deviation are selected.

  If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is the "variation pattern command", it is the timing to start the variation display on the decorative pattern display device 42, so the start setting process is performed in step S703-8 and step S703. Move to -9.

  In the start setting process of step S703-8, various settings relating to variable display performed by the decorative symbol display device 42 are performed.

  In this start setting process, first, similarly to the case of the special variation holding area of the main control device 261, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the sub variation holding area to the sub execution area side is executed. Then, the variation time corresponding to the received "variation pattern command" is set in the "variation display timer". The “variable display timer” is a means for measuring the variable time (remaining time of variable display) in the decorative pattern display device 42, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of variable display.

  Further, in the start setting process, the “variable display flag” that is taken into consideration when determining whether or not the decorative pattern display device 42 is performing variable display is turned on.

  Further, in the start setting process, based on the “game state determination value Xj” included in the received “variable pattern command”, the effect mode (“normal effect mode”, “time saving effect mode”, “in the decorative symbol display device 42”) The latent probability effect mode "or the" probability variation effect mode ") is determined, and the variation pattern related to the variable display of the symbols is determined based on the variation pattern information (variation mode) stored in the" variation pattern command ". In addition, based on the hit type information (including “out”), the stop symbol (combination of stop symbols) to be stopped and displayed after the lapse of the variable time is determined. The variation pattern and the effect mode (“game state determination value Xj”) determined here, and information regarding the stop symbol are additionally written in the sub execution area of the sub variation holding area. The RAM 553 that stores the “game state determination value Xj” included in the “fluctuation pattern command” constitutes the mode information storage unit in the present embodiment. The correspondence between the variation time information and the variation pattern in each effect mode, and the correspondence between the jackpot type information and the stop symbol are stored in a table in the ROM 552 of the sub control device 262.

  That is, also in the sub-control device 262, similarly to the main control device 261, a variation pattern corresponding to "16R probability variation jackpot", a variation pattern corresponding to "8R probability variation jackpot", a variation pattern corresponding to "2R probability variation jackpot", " A variation pattern corresponding to "2R short-time jackpot", a variation pattern corresponding to "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit", a variation pattern corresponding to "out-of-front / rear reach", a variation pattern corresponding to "reach other than out-of-front / reach", and , A plurality of table groups respectively corresponding to the values "1" to "4" of the "gaming state determination value Xj" are stored with respect to the variation pattern corresponding to "complete deviation".

  Then, when determining the variation pattern in the decorative pattern display device 42, the sub-control device 262, based on the "game state determination value Xj" included in the variation pattern command, selects from the plurality of table groups in the effect mode ("the game state. A table corresponding to the values "1" to "4" of the judgment value Xj "is selected. Next, the fluctuation pattern is determined by taking into consideration the selected table.

  Further, in the start setting process, when the effect mode is the “time saving effect mode” (“the game state determination value Xj” is “2”), the sub control device 262 transmits the “support” transmitted from the main controller 261. Based on the value of the “count counter”, a command to be transmitted to the display control device 45 is set in order to display the remaining number of fluctuations to which the “high support mode” is given in the decorative pattern display device 42. However, even if the effect mode is the “time saving effect mode”, if the “lottery mode” is the “high probability mode” (note that the sub-control device 262 determines whether the “high probability mode” or not) This is performed based on the command including the "lottery mode flag" transmitted from the main control device 261), and the sub control device 262 itself measures the number of times of receiving the "variation pattern command" after the "time saving production mode". At the same time, information corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations is obtained based on the number of measurements. Then, the sub-control device 262 sets a command for displaying on the decorative pattern display device 42 the information visible on the surface in the remaining number of fluctuations to which the “high support mode” is added, based on the obtained information. . It should be noted that this information is actually dummy information, which has nothing to do with the number of remaining fluctuations to which the “high support mode” is added. Further, the set command is output to the display control device 45 in an external output process S710 described later, and the display control device 45 controls the decorative symbol display device 42 to output the command output in the decorative symbol display device 42. Will be displayed. Further, in place of the information regarding the remaining number of fluctuations to which the “high support mode” is given, or the dummy information of the remaining number of fluctuations, the total number of fluctuations in the “high support mode”, or the total number of fluctuations The dummy information may be displayed.

  Subsequent to the start setting in step S703-8, in step S703-9, the "gaming state determination value Xj" included in the "variation pattern command" and the "gaming state determination value stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553. Xj ”is determined whether or not it matches. Here, if the two values match, the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the two values are different, the "state error flag" is turned on in step S703-10, and the "game state determination" included in the newly received "fluctuation pattern command" in step S703-11. The value Xj "is regarded as appropriate and the" game state determination value Xj "is stored in the game state information storage area. After that, this processing ends. When the "state error flag" is turned on, the fact that the two values are different is notified by the error display lamp 104 or the like. Of course, the error notifying means is not limited to the error display lamp 104, and may be configured to notify the error by the decorative symbol display device 42, the speaker SP, or the like.

  Since game machines of recent years have a backup function in the main controller, etc., even when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, various data such as the lottery mode at that time can be stored and held. Even if the power is cut off during the "high probability mode", when the power is restored, the player can restart the game in the "high probability mode".

  However, by using the above backup function, it becomes possible to set the gaming machine in the “high probability mode” from the start of business in the gaming hall, commonly called “morning”. Such an action is performed for the gaming hall to enhance the ability to attract customers at the start of business, but there is a risk that the player's euphoria will be misled. Various methods can be considered as the method of setting the above-mentioned action, but as an example, there is a method of not initializing and resetting the gaming machine whose lottery mode was the “high probability mode” at the end of business on the previous day. Further, as in the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on, the main controller sends information to the sub controller about the effect mode on the display means such as the liquid crystal display (“game state determination value Xj”). In the configuration that is sent by "Return command" etc., if the cable connector that connects the main control unit and the sub control unit is removed when the power is turned on, the sub control unit will actually be set by the main control unit. Therefore, the control related to the default production mode, that is, the "normal production mode" is performed.

  In a general gaming machine, when performing an effect in a display effecting means such as a liquid crystal display device, the display mode (for example, background color) is made different between "low probability mode" and "high probability mode". , It is easy for the player or the like to grasp the current lottery mode.

  Further, in general, a sub-control device that controls a liquid crystal display device or the like does not have a backup function, and therefore, when the power is turned off, control related to the default production mode (“normal production mode”) is performed. .

  Therefore, by utilizing this, it is possible to set the effect mode of the liquid crystal display device to the normal effect mode even though the actual lottery mode set by the main control device is the “high probability mode”. In that case, the current lottery mode cannot be easily determined by just looking at the liquid crystal display device or the like, so that it is substantially difficult to confirm this action by a predetermined investigation or the like.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the "game state determination value Xj" included in the "fluctuation pattern command" and the "game state determination value Xj" stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 553. If they are different, an error is notified to that effect, and the "game state determination value Xj" included in the newly received "variation pattern command" is stored in the game state information storage area. That is, the sub control device 262 can grasp the appropriate presentation mode at that time. As a result, even if the action such as the above "morning" is performed and the actual lottery mode set by the main control device 261 is the "high probability mode", the effect mode in the sub control device 262 is the normal effect. Even if it is a mode, when the "variation pattern command" is received, it is notified that the effect mode is different, and corresponds to the "game state determination value Xj" included in the received "variation pattern command". It becomes the production mode. As a result, the action such as the above "morning" by the game hall can be suppressed.

  Further, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is the "opening command", the opening effect setting process is performed in step S703-12, and this process ends.

  In the opening effect setting process of step S703-12, when "AA" is set in the transmitted "opening command", the sub-control device 262 executes "16R probability change corresponding opening effect" on the decorative pattern display device 42. Set the command to do this. Further, when "AB" is set in the "opening command", a command for executing the "8R probability change corresponding opening effect" is set in the decorative pattern display device 42, and "AC" is set in the "opening command". If is set, a command for executing the "latent probability corresponding opening effect" is set in the decorative symbol display device 42. Further, when "AD" is set in the "opening command", a command for executing the "time saving corresponding opening effect" is set in the decorative pattern display device 42.

  If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is the "xx round open command" or the "xx open eye command", the open production effect setting process is performed in step S703-13, and this process ends. In step S703-13, the sub control device 262 sets a command corresponding to the type of the transmitted “xx round open command (xx open eye command)”.

  If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is the “xx round closing command” or the “xx closing eye command”, the closing effect setting process is performed in step S703-14, and the present process ends. In step S703-14, the sub control device 262 sets a command corresponding to the type of the transmitted "xx round closing command (xx closing eye command)".

  The command set based on the "xx round opening command (xx opening eye command)" and the command set based on the "xx round closing command (xx closing eye command)" are external output processing described later. It is output to the display control device 45 in S710. Then, the display control device 45 controls the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the input command, and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform a big hit medium effect or a small hit medium effect.

  If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is the "ending command", the ending effect setting process is performed in step S703-15, and this process ends.

  In the ending effect setting process of step S703-15, when the "EA" is set in the "ending command", the sub control device 262 is a command for executing the "probable change corresponding ending effect" in the decorative symbol display device 42. To set. Further, when "EB" is set in the "ending command", a command for executing the "latent probability corresponding ending effect" is set in the decorative pattern display device 42, and "EC" is set in the "ending command". When is set, a command for executing the "time saving corresponding ending effect" is set in the decorative pattern display device 42.

  If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a "return effect command", a return effect setting process is performed in step S703-16, and this process ends. In the return effect setting process of step S703-16, the sub control device 262 sets a command for executing the "return effect" on the decorative symbol display device 42.

  If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a "return process suggestion command", a return effect setting process is performed in step S703-17, and this process ends. In step S703-17, the sub control device 262 sets a command for causing the decorative symbol display device 42 to execute the “return process suggestive effect”.

  The command set corresponding to the "opening command", "ending command", "return effect command" or "return process suggestion command" is output to the display control device 45 in the external output process S710 to be described later, and is displayed. By the control device 45 controlling the decorative symbol display device 42, effects (opening effect, ending effect, return effect, etc.) corresponding to the output command will be performed on the decorative symbol display device 42. In the present embodiment, when the display control device 45 receives a command corresponding to the "ending command" during the mid-big hit effect and the small hit mid effect, these effects are stopped and the ending effect is performed. Is configured.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 40, after step S703 or when a negative determination is made in step S701, the process proceeds to step S704, and it is determined whether the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, the start of the previous normal process. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (1 msec in this example) has elapsed from. Then, if the predetermined time has already passed (S704: YES), the process proceeds to step S705, while if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal processing (S705: NO). , And proceeds to step S711.

  In step S705, various counters are updated. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 uses various counter information when displaying symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44, the jackpot decoration symbol counter C5 and the upper, middle, and lower patterns used for setting each out-of-design symbol in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area. It is supposed to use each of the deviation symbol counters CL, CM, and CR. The deviation symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured such that register values are added by using the R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, the numerical values randomly change. The values of these counters are appropriately stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 553.

  The jackpot decorative symbol counter C5 is for determining a symbol (jackpot symbol) that is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 when the "16R probability variation jackpot" or the "8R probability variation jackpot". In this embodiment, five types of odd symbols and five types of even symbols are set as the jackpot symbols. Therefore, five (0 to 4) counter values are prepared as the jackpot decorative pattern counter C5. That is, the jackpot decorative symbol counter C5 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 4 and returned to 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 4). When the “symbol command” transmitted from the main control device 261 is “B1” indicating a combination of odd jackpot symbols, based on a table (a table that associates counter values with symbols), which is not shown, for example, a counter If the value is 0, it is "1" (the doublet), if it is 1, it is "3" (the doublet), if it is 2, it is "5" (the doublet), and if it is 3, "7" (the If it is 4, the combination of odd big jackpot symbols is determined, such as "9" (the doublet).

  Further, when the “symbol command” transmitted from the main control device 261 is “B2” indicating a combination of even jackpot symbols, based on a table (a table that associates counter values with symbols) not shown, for example, a counter If the value is 0, it is "0" (the doublet), if it is 1, it is "2" (the doublet), if it is 2, it is "4" (the doublet), and if it is 3, "6" (the If it is 4, the combination of even big hit symbols is determined such as "8" (the doublet).

  The jackpot decorative symbol counter C5 is periodically updated in the counter updating process of step S705, and when the sub-control device 262 receives the "symbol command" as described above, the counter buffer of the RAM 553 changes it. The value of the stored jackpot decorative symbol counter C5 is read. In the present embodiment, the jackpot decorative symbol counter C5 is stored in the jackpot decorative symbol counter buffer of the RAM 553, but is not stored in the buffer, but the counter value is referred to at the timing of receiving the "symbol command" or the like. You may do it.

  The upper / middle / lower deviation symbol counters CL, CM, and CR determine the respective stop symbols (combination of deviating symbols) in the upper / middle / lower symbol display area when the winning lottery is “missing”. Since any one of the 10 symbols is displayed in each column, 10 (0-9) counter values are prepared for each. The stop symbol of the upper symbol display area is determined by the upper / off symbol counter CL, the stop symbol of the middle symbol display area is determined by the middle / off symbol counter CM, and the stop symbol of the lower symbol display area is determined by the lower / off symbol counter CR. Is determined.

  In this embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the numerical value of the R register built in the CPU 551. That is, when updating each deviation symbol counter CL, CM, CR, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and if the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 10 is subtracted to determine the current value. It Each of the deviation symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combination of the deviation symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is the front / rear outreach symbol buffer of the RAM 553, the reach symbol buffer other than the front / rear outreach, and It is stored in any of the completely out-of-place symbol buffers.

  Here, the update processing of each of the deviation symbol counters CL, CM, and CR will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 42, in step S751, it is determined whether it is the update time of the upper / off symbol counter CL, and in step S752 it is determined whether it is the update time of the medium / off symbol counter CM. The upper, middle, and lower deviation symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured to be updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, if the lower / off symbol counter CR has been updated in the previous update processing, an affirmative decision is made in step S751. If the up / off symbol counter CL has been updated in the previous update processing, an affirmative decision is made in step S752.

  Then, if it is time to update the upper / off symbol counter CL (step S751: YES), the process advances to step S753 to update the upper / off symbol counter CL. If the middle / outside symbol counter CM is updated (step S752: YES), the flow advances to step S754 to update the inside / outside symbol counter CM. Furthermore, if the lower / off symbol counter CR is updated (S751: NO, S752: NO), the process proceeds to step S755 to update the lower / off symbol counter CR. In updating the deviation symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in steps S753 to S755, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and 10 is subtracted when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value. , The calculation result is set as the current value of the deviation symbol counters CL, CM, and CR.

  According to the update processing of the deviation symbol counters CL, CM, and CR, the upper, middle, and lower deviation symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are sequentially updated one by one in one update processing, and each counter value is updated. The times do not overlap. As a result, every time the update process is performed three times, one set of the deviation symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is updated.

  After that, in step S756, the combination of the updated deviating symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of reach symbols (the symbols in the upper symbol display region and the symbols in the lower symbol display region are the same, and the upper and lower symbol display regions are the same). Is different from the symbol in the middle symbol display area), and if it is a combination of reach symbols (S756: YES), in step S757, it is a front / rear reach. Determine if there is. When the deviation symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are combinations of front and rear deviation (front and rear deviation symbols) (S757: YES), the process proceeds to step S758, and the combination of the deviation symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is stored in the RAM 553. Stored in the reach pattern buffer.

  On the other hand, if the removal symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are combinations other than front / rear reach (symbols other than front / rear) (S757: NO), the process proceeds to step S759, and the removal symbol counters CL, CM at that time. , CR are stored in the reach symbol buffer except for the front and rear of the RAM 553.

  If the combination is a combination other than the reach symbol (S756: NO), the process proceeds to step S760, and it is determined whether the combination of the deviation symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of the deviation symbols, and the combination is removed. If the combination of symbols (complete removal symbol) (S760: YES), the process proceeds to step S761, and the combination of the removal symbol counters CL, CM, CR at that time is stored in the complete removal symbol buffer of the RAM 553. In addition, when both steps S756 and S760 are NO, the symbols are aligned on the upper, middle and lower sides, that is, it corresponds to a combination of the jackpot symbols, but in such a case, the deviation symbol counters CL, CM and CR are stored in the buffer. This process is terminated without storing. Further, even if the combination of the deviation symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is the combination of the regulated symbols, this processing is terminated without storing the deviation symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in the buffer.

  In the present embodiment, the combination of the prescribed symbols that is stopped and displayed in the case of “2R short-term big hit” or the like is one pattern (“2”, “4”, “6”) It is not necessary to use the counter information when displaying the symbols.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 40, following step S705, the variable display setting processing of step S706 is performed. The variable display setting process is mainly a process for performing variable display of symbols on the decorative symbol display device 42. Next, the variable display setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 43, in step S706-1, by looking at the setting status of the “variable display flag”, it is determined whether the decorative pattern display device 42 is performing variable display. Specifically, if the "variation display flag" is set (in the on state), it is considered to be in the variation display, and if the "variation display flag" is cleared (in the off state) , It is considered that the variable display is in the stopped display, which is the stopped state. As described above, the “variable display flag” is turned on (in the start setting process of step S703-8) when the variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is started, and the variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is displayed. Is turned off (in the stop display setting of step S706-5 described later) when is displayed in a stopped state.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S706-1, that is, when the fluctuation starts or during fluctuation, the process proceeds to step S706-2, and when a negative determination is made in step S706-1, the present process is ended as it is. .

  In step S706-2, variable display timer subtraction processing is performed. Each time this process is performed, the value of the "variable display timer" is decremented by one. As described above, the “variation display timer” is set when the variation display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is started (in the start setting process of step S703-8). Further, since the normal processing in the sub-control device 262 is performed every 1 msec and the value of the “variation display timer” is decremented by 1 every 1 msec, for example, when the variation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec). , "10000" is set for the "variation display timer".

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S706-3, in which the value of the "variation display timer" after the subtraction is taken into consideration to determine whether or not a predetermined variation time has elapsed. At this time, when the predetermined variation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the variation display timer becomes "0", the affirmative determination is made in step S706-3.

  When a negative determination is made in step S706-3, in step S706-4, a variation execution process for performing variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed, and this process ends.

  In this variation execution process, for example, various calculation processes such as generating a “display command” to be output to the display control device 45 based on various information stored in the execution region of the sub variation holding area of the RAM 553, and the output setting of the command. I do.

  Thereby, the display control device 45 performs the drawing process in accordance with the instruction from the sub control device 262, and starts the variable display of the symbols on the decorative symbol display device 42. Further, along with the variation execution process, the effect mode (“normal effect mode”, “time saving effect mode”, “substantiation effect mode” or “probability variation effect mode”) in the decorative symbol display device 42 is switched. That is, the sub-control device 262 that executes the variation execution process S706-4 constitutes an effect mode setting unit that sets the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 42 to various modes. Further, the display control device 45 constitutes an effect control means.

  Further, once the “fluctuation pattern command” is received from the main control device 261, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display corresponding to the “variation pattern command” elapses (set by the start setting process of step S706-8). Until the value of the "variation display timer" becomes "0"), the variable display of symbols is continued under the cooperation of the sub-control device 262 and the display control device 45.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S706-3, that is, if the value of the "variable display timer" is determined to be "0", a stop display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 in step S706-5. The stop display setting for performing is performed, and this processing ends. In the stop display setting, the “variation display flag” is released (turned off), and a “stop command” for instructing the display control device 45 to stop the variable display on the decorative symbol display device 42 is set.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 40, in the lamp setting process of step S707 subsequent to the variable display setting process of step S706, the lighting pattern of the lamp / illumination is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative pattern display device 42. .

  In the voice setting process of step S708, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set so as to be synchronized with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42. Further, when a command related to voice such as notification of error occurrence is transmitted from the main control device 261, setting for performing these controls is also performed in step S708.

  In step S709, other processing such as control setting of customer waiting effect (for example, a demo screen display set to be displayed when a predetermined time elapses while the variable display of the decorative pattern display device 42 is not being displayed) is performed. To do.

  In step S710, an external output process of transmitting a control signal to each device based on the setting contents of steps S703 to S709 is executed. For example, at the time of the opening effect in the decorative pattern display device 42, the command set corresponding to the “opening command” is transmitted to the display control device 45. Further, when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the symbols in a variable manner, a “display command” is transmitted to the display control device 45.

  After the processing of steps S705 to S710 performed every 1 msec is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S704, the process proceeds to step S711 to determine whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 553. To determine. The power-off occurrence information is stored when the “power-off command” is received from main controller 261.

  When the power-off occurrence information is not stored (S711: NO), the process proceeds to step S712, and it is determined whether the RAM 553 is destroyed. If the RAM 553 has not been destroyed (S712: NO), the process returns to step S701, and the normal process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 is destroyed (S712: YES), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes.

  If it is determined in step S711 that the power-off occurrence information is stored (S711: YES), the power-off process is executed in step S713. In the power-off processing, generation of interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. Also, the storage of the information on occurrence of power failure is erased. After the power-off process is executed, the process loops endlessly.

  Next, the display mode and the like on the display section 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 will be described together with the flow of the game by the player.

  As shown in FIGS. 59 to 61, in the display section 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42, in the normal state, a variable display region W1 including three symbol display regions of upper, middle and lower is set. Further, below the variable display area W1, an instruction display area W2 for instructing (recommending) a player's shooting mode of the game ball is set, and below that, the number of variable display suspensions is shown. The hold display area W3 is set.

  The hold display area W3 is set to correspond to the sub variable hold area. That is, the hold display area W3 is divided into the first hold display area W3a and the second hold display area W3b corresponding to the first sub variation hold area and the second sub variation hold area. Then, in each of the hold display areas W3a and W3b, hold images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4 corresponding to four hold areas (holding first to holding fourth areas) are displayed.

  The reserved images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4 are displayed in a non-lighting manner during normal times (non-holding time) (see a shaded portion), and when the variable display is held in a predetermined holding area, The reserved images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4 corresponding to the reserved areas are switched and displayed in a lighting mode (see white circles).

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 59 to 61, the first reserved image TA1 and the second reserved image TA2 in the first reserved display area W3a are displayed in a lighting mode, and the remaining reserved images TA3, TA4, TB1 to TB4 are in a non-lighting mode. The displayed state is shown. That is, the variable display is suspended in the suspending first area and the suspending second area of the first sub-variable suspending area, and the current suspension display number of the variable display is “2” states related to the upper starting winning opening 33A. It is shown.

  In the "low support mode", an instruction display is provided so that the player recommends an action of launching a game ball toward the left side area of the variable display device unit 35 (this action is hereinafter referred to as "left hitting"). “← Left-handed” is displayed in the area W2. In accordance with this, the player "left-hands" to play the game. The left side area of the variable display device unit 35 constitutes the first area in this embodiment.

  When "left hitting" is performed, most of the game balls are guided toward the upper start winning opening 33A located below the variable display device unit 35 by the nails or the like. Among them, how many game balls will be won in the upper start winning port 33A.

  In the present embodiment, the through gate 34 that triggers the opening of the lower start winning opening 33B (electrical accessory 37) flows down the right side area of the variable display device unit 35, that is, the left side area of the variable display device unit 35. The game ball is placed in an unreachable position. Furthermore, in the "low support mode", the probability of winning the lower start winning opening 33B (electric accessory 37) in the open lottery is 1/10, which is relatively low. In addition, the game ball flowing down the right side region of the variable display device unit 35 is hardly guided to the upper start winning port 33A by the nail or the like. That is, in the present embodiment, in the "low support mode", the player performs an action of launching a game ball toward the right side area of the variable display device unit 35 (this action is hereinafter referred to as "right hitting"). In this case, the starting winning openings 33A and 33B are hard to win. Therefore, in the "low support mode", it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by "left hitting" and playing the game. The area on the right side of the variable display device unit 35 constitutes the second area in this embodiment.

  When the game ball wins the upper start winning opening 33A, in the variable display area W1 of the decorative symbol display device 42, a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed for each of the symbol display areas. In this embodiment, the symbols Z with the numbers "1" to "9" are displayed. The various symbols Z are scroll-variably displayed from the right to the left with periodicity in ascending or descending order of numbers, whereby a series of symbols is formed.

  In such a case, in the upper symbol display area, various symbols Z are displayed in descending order (the order in which the numbers attached are decreased), and in the middle symbol display area and the lower symbol display area, various symbols Z are also in ascending order (attached). It is displayed in the order of increasing numbers). Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol display area → the lower symbol display area → the middle symbol display area, and the symbol Z is stopped and displayed in each symbol display area.

  If you win the winning lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the top starting winning opening 33A, and win the "16R certainty variation jackpot" or "8R certainty variation jackpot", you will reach the jackpot on the predetermined jackpot line through the reach state. The combination Z of symbols Z (Zoro eyes arranged in a line) is stopped and displayed. In the normal state of the present embodiment (the "normal effect mode" and the "latent probability effect mode"), the jackpot line is composed of left, middle and right vertical lines and two diagonal lines ( 5 lines). Therefore, in the upper / middle / lower symbol display area, when three symbols Z of the combination of jackpots are stopped and displayed side by side on any one of the five lines, "16R probability jackpot" or "8R probability jackpot" The occurrence of "big hit" is confirmed.

  When "16R probability variation jackpot" is won, "16R probability variation corresponding opening effect" is performed on the display section 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42, and a jackpot state occurs. When the "8R probability variation big hit" is won, the "8R probability variation corresponding opening effect" is performed on the display section 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 as shown in FIGS. A condition occurs. In the present embodiment, a part of the "16R probability change corresponding opening effect" and the "8R probability change corresponding opening effect" are common effects, so that the data capacity can be reduced. The number of rounds awarded in the jackpot state may be displayed in the "opening effect".

  After the completion of the "16R probability change corresponding opening effect" or "8R probability change corresponding opening effect", the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is opened, and the game ball can be won into the special winning opening 32a. The opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 32b is performed by the number (16R or 8R). Further, in the display portion 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42, when the opening / closing plate 32b is open, an effect during opening as shown in FIG. 68 is performed, and when the opening / closing plate 32b is closed, it is shown in FIG. Such a closed production is performed. By performing the opening effect and the closing effect alternately, a predetermined jackpot effect is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the current round is displayed in the big hit midway effect (opening midtime effect). In addition, in the present embodiment, the first half of the effects (effects up to the eighth round) of the big hit medium effects that are performed when the "16R probability variable jackpot" occurs when the "8R probability variable jackpot" occurs. It is the same as the big hit medium-sized production. Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the variable winning device 32 is arranged in the right side region of the variable display device unit 35 (the position where the game ball flowing down the left side region of the variable display device unit 35 cannot reach). If the player continues to "left hit", it is difficult to win a game ball to the variable winning device 32. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 66 to 69, in the effect indicating the type of jackpot (“16R probability variation jackpot” or “8R probability variation jackpot”) among the opening effects, and in the jackpot medium effect, in the instruction display area W2, the game is displayed. “Right hit →” is displayed so that the person recommends the action of launching the game ball toward the right side area of the variable display device unit 35 (“right hit”). According to this, the player switches from "left hitting" to "right hitting" so that the game ball passes above the variable display device unit 35 and heads toward the right side area of the variable display device unit 35 to perform a jackpot game. .

  If the player hits "right" here, most of the game balls are guided to the variable winning device 32 by the nails or the like, and win the variable winning device 32. As a result, the player can obtain more game balls.

  When the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is opened / closed for a predetermined number of rounds, a "probable change corresponding ending effect" is performed on the display section 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42, as shown in FIG. Then, the effect mode on the display section 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 from the time of the next change is set to the "probable change effect mode" (see, for example, FIG. 71). Further, the lottery mode is set to "high probability mode" and "until next time / high support mode" is added.

  In the state where the "high support mode" is given, a display recommending "right-handed" is displayed in the instruction display area W2. The through gate 34 that triggers the opening of the lower start winning opening 33B (electrical accessory 37) is arranged in the right side area of the variable display device unit 35, and in the "high support mode", the lower starting winning opening 33B. The probability of winning the open lottery of (electric accessory 37) is relatively high (the winning probability is set to 8/10 in the present embodiment). Therefore, by "right hitting", most of the game balls can easily enter the lower start winning port 33B, the number of times the jackpot lottery is executed is increased, and the ball can be held well.

  In addition, when the winning lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the lower start winning hole 33B is won and "16R probability variation jackpot" or "8R probability variation jackpot" is won, the display portion 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 is started up. The same effect as in the case of winning the winning lottery based on the winning of the game ball into the winning opening 33A is performed. In addition, when "16R probability variation big hit" or "8R probability variation big hit" is won, regardless of the effect mode in the display section 42a of the decoration symbol display device 42 at the time when the big hit occurs, the decoration pattern from the time of the next variation The effect mode on the display section 42a of the display device 42 is set to the "probable variation effect mode".

  If you win the winning lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the upper starting winning opening 33A or the lower starting winning opening 33B and win the "2R probability variation big hit", as shown in FIG. 72, a special symbol in the middle symbol display area ZS is stopped and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 73, the "latent probability corresponding opening effect" is performed on the display portion 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42, and the big hit state occurs.

  Further, in the jackpot state, while the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is opened / closed a predetermined number of times (two times in the present embodiment) in a relatively short time, on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42, Following the "latent probability correspondence opening effect", a big hit medium effect is executed. Then, the ending effect is executed following the big hit mid effect. Here, in the present embodiment, the big hit is made by the production mode (the value of the “game state determination Xj”) and the lottery mode (the “high probability mode” or the “low probability mode”) at the time of winning the “2R probability variation big hit”. The staging and ending staging, and eventually the staging mode from the next change, are different.

  Specifically, when the production mode is the “normal production mode”, or when the production mode is the “latent probability production mode” in the “low probability mode” and the “2R probability variation jackpot” is won, As shown in FIG. 74, during the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32, the “intelligence-prone big hit mid effect” is executed as the big hit mid effect on the display section 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42. Then, following the big hit mid-effect, on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42, as shown in FIG. 75, a "latent probability corresponding ending effect" is executed. Further, subsequent to the ending effect, as shown in FIG. 76, the effect mode in the display section 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 from the time of the next change is set to the “latent probability effect mode”. Further, the lottery mode is set to the “high probability mode” and the “low support mode” is added.

  On the other hand, when the production mode is the "time saving production mode" or the "probability variation production mode", or when the production mode is the "substantial production mode" in the "high probability mode", the "2R probability variation jackpot" is won. In this case, following the "latent probability correspondence opening presentation", during the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 32, as shown in FIG. To be executed. Next, in the display section 42a, "probability change ending corresponding effect" (see FIG. 70) is executed as an ending effect, and after the ending effect, the effect mode in the display section 42a from the next change time is "probability change effect mode" (Fig. 71)). Further, the lottery mode is set to "high probability mode" and "until next time / high support mode" is added.

  When the winning lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the lower start winning hole 33B is won and the "2R short-term big jackpot" is won, as shown in FIG. 78, the combination of the prescribed symbols is stopped and displayed. In the part 42a, "a time saving correspondence opening effect" is performed, and a big hit state occurs. Then, while the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is opened / closed a predetermined number of times (two times in the present embodiment) in a relatively short time, as shown in FIG. As the effect, "time-saving corresponding big hit medium effect" is executed. Then, following the big hit mid-effect, the display unit 42a executes the "time-saving corresponding ending effect" as the ending effect, as shown in FIG. Further, after the ending effect (after the jackpot state is over), as shown in FIG. 81, the effect mode on the display unit 42a from the time of the next change is set to the “time saving effect mode”. Further, the lottery mode is set to the “low probability mode” and the “100 times / high support mode” is given.

  In addition, when "2R time saving big hit" is won, regardless of the effect mode when the big hit occurs, the effect mode from the time of the next change is set to "time saving effect mode". In addition, information indicating the remaining number of fluctuations to which the “high support mode” is added is displayed on the display unit 42a.

  Furthermore, when "2R short-time jackpot" is won, since "high support mode" is given, "right hit" is displayed in the instruction display area W2 at the time of effects such as opening effects and ending effects, and during fluctuations. Is recommended. In addition, immediately before the start of the normal game (for example, ending effect), in addition to or in place of the instruction display area W2, "right hitting" is performed on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 from the time when the next variation starts. You may display the recommended display.

  If you win the winning lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the upper starting winning opening 33A and win the "2R normal big hit" or "small hit", the special symbol ZS in the middle symbol display area after the reach state. Is displayed as a stop, or the symbols of the prescribed combination are displayed as a stop. After the stop display of the symbol, the opening effect, the big hit medium effect and the ending effect are executed on the display section 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42, but the effect mode at the time when the "2R normal big hit" or "small hit" is won ( Depending on the value of the "game state determination Xj"), the stop symbol, the opening effect, the big hit medium effect, the ending effect, and the effect mode from the time of the next change are different.

  Specifically, when the "2R normal big hit" or "small win" is won when the effect mode is the "normal effect mode" or the "latent probability effect mode", as shown in FIG. After passing through the state, the special symbol ZS is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area. Subsequently, in the display section 42a, as shown in FIG. 73, a "latent probability correspondence opening effect" is executed as the opening effect. Further, while the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is opened / closed a predetermined number of times (up to twice in the present embodiment) in a relatively short time, as shown in FIG. As a performance, "a performance in the midst of a big hit corresponding to the latent accuracy" is executed. As shown in FIG. 51, the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 is the same both when the "2R normal big hit" is won and when the "small win" is won. Then, following the big hit mid effect, on the display unit 42a, as shown in FIG.

  Following the ending effect, as shown in FIG. 76, the effect mode on the display unit 42a from the time of the next change is set to the “latent probability effect mode”. If you win the "2R regular jackpot", the lottery mode will be set to "low probability mode" and "low support mode" will be given to you when you change from the next time. If the player wins, the current lottery mode and support mode are maintained. However, in the "normal effect mode" or the "latent probability effect mode", since the "low support mode" is given, even if the "small win" is won, if the "2R normal big hit" is won Similarly, the support mode from the time of the next change will be the “low support mode”. Since the "low support mode" is added, a display recommending "left hitting" in the next regular game is displayed in the instruction display area W2.

  Further, as described above, in the case of winning the "2R normal big hit" or "small hit" in the "normal effect mode" or the "latent probability effect mode", the stop symbol, the opening effect, the big hit medium effect, the ending effect, and the variable winning a prize. The opening / closing pattern of the device 32 and the effect mode from the time of the next change are the opening effect when the "2R probability variation jackpot" is won in the "normal effect mode" or the "low probability mode" of the "potential accuracy effect mode". Is the same as Therefore, when the production mode is the "normal production mode", when the "2R probability variation jackpot" is won and when the "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit" occurs, the stop symbol or the variable winning device 32 There is no difference in the opening / closing pattern, the effect at the time of hitting (the opening effect, the effect during the big hit, and the ending effect), the effect mode after hitting, and the support mode. Therefore, the player cannot determine whether the "2R probability variable jackpot" is won, the "2R normal jackpot" or the "small hit" based on the display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 and the opening / closing mode of the variable winning device 32. It will be. Therefore, the player can expect the winning of the “2R probability variation jackpot” and the transition to the “high probability mode”, and the interest can be improved.

  In addition, as described above, when the production mode is the “normal production mode” or the “latent probability production mode”, if the “2R normal big hit” or “small hit” is won, the stop symbol, the hit The effects are the same, the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 is the same, and the effect mode and the support mode from the next change are also the same. Therefore, the player cannot distinguish whether the “2R normal big hit” or the “small hit” has occurred based on the display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 and the opening / closing mode of the variable winning device 32. . Therefore, when the above-mentioned production corresponding to "2R normal big hit" or "small win" is made in the "latent probability production mode" in which the "high probability mode" can be set, the player generates a "small win". However, it is difficult to determine whether the "high probability mode" can be expected to be maintained or the "2R normal jackpot" occurs and the lottery mode becomes the "low probability mode". Therefore, even if the player is actually in the “low probability mode”, he / she can play the game with a sense of expectation that the mode is in the “high probability mode”.

  It should be noted that, as one of the winning modes, while the same effect as in the "2R probability variation jackpot" is performed, the "2R normal jackpot" that allows the lottery mode to shift to the "low probability mode" is provided. , "2R probability variation big hit" may be generated more frequently. More specifically, by providing a "2R regular jackpot", even if the player wins the "2R probability variation jackpot" and becomes the "high probability mode" "substantial effect mode", at this time it becomes a "2R regular jackpot". By winning, it is possible to shift (fall) to the “low probability mode”. In other words, the presence of the “2R normal jackpot” causes a possibility of shifting (falling down) to the “low probability mode” in the “latent probability effect mode” of the “high probability mode”. Therefore, in consideration of this possibility, the frequency of occurrence of the “2R probability variation big hit” may be increased. By increasing the frequency of occurrence of "2R probability variable jackpot", when "2R probability variable jackpot", "2R regular jackpot" and "small hit" are performed, the "2R probability variation jackpot" is won Can be expected more, and the interest of the player can be further improved.

  Returning to the explanation of the opening effects, etc. in the case of winning the "2R normal big hit" or "small win", when the "time saving performance mode" or the "probability variation production mode", the "2R normal big hit" or "small hit" In the case of winning, as shown in FIG. 78, the combination of the regulated symbols is stopped and displayed, and the "time-saving corresponding opening effect" is performed on the display section 42a. After that, as shown in FIG. 79, while the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is opened / closed a predetermined number of times (maximum two times in the present embodiment) in a relatively short time, a big hit in the display section 42a. As the effect, "time-saving corresponding big hit medium effect" is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 80, the “time-saving corresponding ending effect” is executed as the ending effect as shown in FIG. 80, and after the ending effect (after the jackpot state ends), as shown in FIG. The effect mode on the display unit 42a from the time of change of is set to the "time saving effect mode". The lottery mode is set to the "low probability mode" when the "2R normal big hit" is won, while the lottery mode at the present time is maintained as it is when the "small win" is won. Further, as the support mode, "100 times / high support mode" is given when "2R normal big hit" is won, but the current support mode is maintained as it is when "small hit". However, in the normal game after the "small hit", the "high support mode" is determined based on the information indicating the total number of fluctuations after the "time saving effect mode" is obtained in the sub control device 262. Dummy information as if indicating the remaining number of fluctuations to be given is displayed on the display unit 42a. This information is displayed in the same manner as the remaining number of fluctuations to which the "high support mode" is added, which is displayed when the "2R regular jackpot" is won, and therefore the player is based on this display manner. , "2R normal big hit" and "small hit" cannot be distinguished.

  As described above, in the “time saving production mode” and the “probability variation production mode”, the “high support mode” is added, so that the player can advantageously perform the game by performing “right hit”. It is like this. Then, as described above, at the time of "right hitting", it is difficult for the game ball to win the upper start winning port 33A. Therefore, the "2R normal jackpot" that is generated only by winning the game ball to the upper start winning port 33A is extremely unlikely to occur in the "time saving production mode" or the "probability variation production mode", but it does not mean that there is no occurrence probability. . Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the "2R normal jackpot" is won in the "time saving production mode" or the "probability variation production mode", the stop symbol, the production at the time of the hit, the lottery mode and the support mode in the normal game after the hit, It is configured to be the same as those when "2R hour / hour jackpot" is won. That is, the winning of the "2R regular jackpot" in the "time saving performance mode" or the "probability variation rendering mode" is configured to be treated in the same manner as the winning of the "2R time saving jackpot". Therefore, when the "2R normal jackpot" is won in the "normal effect mode" or the "latent probability effect mode", the "low support mode" is switched to, but the "high support mode" is added. When the "2R normal jackpot" is won in the "time saving production mode" or the "probability variation production mode", the "high support mode" is maintained. As a result, the support mode is not switched to the "low support mode" (the "high support mode" is abruptly discontinued) when the "2R regular jackpot" is won, and the enjoyment of the player is prevented from decreasing. You can

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 42 is the “probability variation effect mode”, when the “2R hour short jackpot (2R normal jackpot)” is won, and the “small hit”. There is no apparent difference in the open / close pattern of the variable winning device 32, the effect at the time of winning, the effect mode after hitting, and the number of times of support between the time when the player is won and the player wins "2R short-time jackpot" (2R normal jackpot). It will be impossible to determine whether the player has won (is the "low probability mode") or the "small hit" (is the "high probability mode" maintained)?

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the "small hit" winning / winning lottery is performed only when the winning to the upper starting winning opening 33A is a trigger. Then, during the “time saving mode” to which the “high support mode” is given, or during the “probability variation mode”, the player normally makes a “right hit”, which is a trigger for the “small hit” win / loss lottery. Winning to the upper start winning opening 33A is unlikely to occur. That is, in the present embodiment, the "small hit" is less likely to occur during the "time saving mode" or the "probability variation mode".

  Now, when the production mode is the “probability variation production mode”, a “small hit” occurs, and when the production mode is the “time saving production mode”, the display returns to the “probability variation production mode” after a predetermined number of times of fluctuation display. Will occur. That is, after the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the “return effect” is performed on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 82, the same character as the character displayed at the time of the "16R probability variation jackpot", that is, the character displayed when a more advantageous game state is created for the player, appears. This gives the player the expectation that some advantageous state will be brought about. Then, following the display of the character, as shown in FIG. 83, a character or the like that clearly indicates that the “probable variation effect mode” is returned to is displayed. As a result, the player feels a pleasant surprise and a sense of happiness that the above-mentioned expectation becomes a reality and the player can enter the “probability variation mode” again.

  Then, after the "return effect", as shown in FIG. 71, the effect mode in the variable display from the next time is set to the "probable change effect mode". Further, as the support mode, the "until next time / high support mode" is maintained. In this embodiment, the process of turning on the “return flag”, the process of setting the “return counter”, and the subtraction of the “return counter” are performed, and the “return effect command” is set after the specified number of times of variable display. The function of the main control device 261 that performs the processing and a sub-control device that causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform "return effect" by controlling the display control device 45 when the "return effect command" is received. The function of 262 and the decorative pattern display device 42 for performing the "return effect" constitute an information transmitting means.

  In addition, when there is a winning of the game ball to the variable winning device 32 at the time of winning the "small hit" in the "probability change effect mode", "return processing suggestion effect" that suggests the occurrence of "return effect" is performed. . More specifically, in the “return processing suggestive effect” in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 84, the reach is performed from the beginning of the “shortening effect mode” after the small hit until the “return effect” is executed. The same character as the character displayed at the time of "16R probability change jackpot" (characters displayed when causing an advantageous state to the player) when the design is changed or stopped, except during production. Is displayed on the display section 42a. The "return processing suggestion effect" in which this character is displayed reduces the disappointment that the player "falls into a shorter working time mode (falls into a disadvantageous state)" and creates an advantageous state. You will get a sense of expectation that it may be possible, and a sense of security that a favorable situation has been promised. After that, "return production" is performed, and by returning to the "probability variation production mode", the player has a sense of satisfaction and a great sense of happiness that the expectations that he / she had have become reality.

  As described above in detail, according to the present embodiment, in the case where the effect mode is the “probability variation effect mode”, when the “2R hour-short jackpot” (“2R normal jackpot”) or “small hit” occurs, The effect mode from the time of the next change is the same (in the present embodiment, both are "time saving effect modes").

  Conventionally, when a "small hit" occurs when the production mode is the "probability variation production mode", the production mode in the variation display from the next time remains the "probability variation production mode", or In general, it is a production mode in which there is an expectation that the "high probability mode" is maintained. Therefore, in the normal game after the "small hit" has occurred, the player thinks that the lottery mode is the "high probability mode" as before the "small hit" has occurred. Therefore, even if a "small hit" occurs when the effect mode is the "probability variation effect mode", there is no particular feeling of uplifting or satisfaction to the player. That is, in the "probable variation effect mode" in which a big hit is likely to occur, the player expects a "big hit" to be generated, and in this state, even if a "small hit" occurs, a particular feeling of satisfaction is generated. Instead, there is a risk that the interest will be lost. In other words, the "small hit" in the conventional "probability variation effect mode" may be a so-called "waste" that does not particularly contribute to the improvement of the game playability.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a "2R short-time big hit" ("2R normal big hit") or a "small hit" occurs in the "probability variation effect mode", the effect mode from the next change is the same. "Time-saving production mode". Here, since the probability of a big hit is high in the “probability variation effect mode” (the lottery mode is the “high probability mode”), the player in the “probability variation effect mode” usually wants to get a lot of balls. Play with a feeling of excitement and expectation. In particular, in the present embodiment, the jackpot that is most advantageous to the player in the "probability variation effect mode" ("16R probability variation jackpot") is likely to occur, and thus the uplifting feeling and the feeling of expectation are very large. On the other hand, winning the "2R time / short jackpot" in the "probabilistic production mode" means falling from the "high probability mode" to the "low probability mode", and the "probable variation production mode" accompanying the occurrence of the "2R time / short jackpot". The transition from "to the time-saving production mode" suddenly disperses the above-mentioned uplifting feeling and expectation that the player usually has, and creates a great disappointment that "the high probability mode has ended". It will be given to the player. Particularly, in the present embodiment, since the uplifting feeling and the expectation are likely to be large, the disappointment may be very large. In view of this point, in the present embodiment, even when a "small hit" that the "high probability mode" is maintained occurs, a "2R time / short jackpot" ("2R normal hit" that shifts to the "low probability mode" is performed. Even when a "big hit" occurs, the effect mode is similarly configured to shift to the "time saving effect mode". That is, even if a hit occurs in the "probability variation effect mode" and the "probability variation effect mode" is changed to the "time saving effect mode", the "high probability mode" may be maintained. Then, for the player, since the same effect mode is set after the hit, whether the "small hit" occurs and the "high probability mode" is maintained, or the "2R short-time big hit" ("2R normal big hit") It becomes difficult to distinguish whether the lottery mode has occurred and the lottery mode has changed (fallen) from the “high probability mode” to the “low probability mode”. Therefore, the player is less likely to be disappointed that he / she has switched to the "low probability mode", and has a high level of expectation that the "high probability mode" is still maintained. It can be carried out. As a result, the interest for the player can be improved. That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the player by utilizing the “small hit” that may be “wasted” in the past.

  In addition, when the production mode is the "probability variation production mode", when "2R short-time big hit" ("2R normal big hit") or "small hit" occurs, it is executed by the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42. The effect, the number of times of support, the stop pattern at the time of a hit, and the opening pattern of the variable winning device 32 are configured to be the same. Therefore, the player may have a "small win" and the "high probability mode" may be maintained, or a "2R short time big hit" ("2R normal big hit") may occur, and the lottery mode may be the "high probability mode". It becomes more difficult to determine whether the shift from the “low probability mode” to the “low probability mode” has occurred. As a result, the interest of the player can be further improved.

  In addition, conventionally, it is general to separately prepare an effect (ending effect, etc.) that is performed when a “small hit” occurs when the effect mode is the “probability variation effect mode”. Takes time. Here, it is necessary to create and prepare an effect that is frequently executed, even if labor is required, from the viewpoint of making the game less tiring and improving the game playability. In addition, production that is of great value to the player (for example, a premium reach production that occurs only at the time of a big hit, although the frequency of occurrence is low) stimulates the player's curiosity and enhances playability. It is necessary to create and prepare if necessary. However, an effect that is infrequently executed and of low value to the player does not contribute much to the improvement of the game playability, though it requires labor to create the effect. In other words, when the "small hit" occurs when the production mode is the "probability variation production mode", the effort to create this is to take into consideration the degree of improvement in the playability brought about by the production. Is not preferable.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, a win / win lottery for "small hit" occurs only by winning the upper start entrance 33A, and when the production mode is the "probability variation production mode", the player normally performs "right hit". Therefore, it is in a state in which it is difficult for the winning to the upper start winning port 33A. That is, in the case where the effect mode is the "probable variation effect mode", the "small hit" is very unlikely to occur. Therefore, even if an effect that is produced when a "small hit" occurs when the effect mode is the "probability variation effect mode", the effect rarely occurs.

  In this regard, in the present embodiment, an effect that is performed when the "small hit" occurs when the effect mode is the "probable variation effect mode", and a "2R time short and big hit when the effect mode is the" probable variation effect mode ". The same effect (in the present embodiment, "a time-saving corresponding opening effect", "a time-saving corresponding big hit medium effect", and "a time-saving corresponding ending effect") is performed when the "etc." occurs. Therefore, unlike the conventional art, it is not necessary to separately prepare an effect to be performed when the “small hit” occurs when the effect mode is the “probability variation effect mode”, and the “small It is possible to avoid creating an effect corresponding to "win". As a result, it is possible to reduce the time and effort required to create the effect without degrading the playability. Further, on the side of the main controller 261 and the sub controller 262, it is possible to reduce the data capacity and the processing load.

  In addition, if the occurrence frequency of the "small hit" in the "probabilistic effect production mode" is extremely low, when a hit occurs in the "probable effect production mode" and the production mode is changed to the "time saving production mode". , The probability that the lottery mode is switched to the “low probability mode” is relatively high. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the lottery mode has changed from the “high probability mode” to the “low probability mode” (however, in the case of the player, “high probability”). There is a considerable sense of expectation that the "mode" is being continued).

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the "small hit" is generated in the "probability variation effect mode", the "return effect" is performed and the "time saving effect mode" is returned to the "probability variation effect mode". It is configured. Here, as described above, the transition from the "probability variation production mode" to the "time saving production mode" that accompanies the occurrence of a hit in the "probability variation production mode" usually causes a sudden increase in the player's feeling of elation or expectation. It causes the player to feel a big disappointment that "the probability change mode has ended". In the present embodiment, as described above, even when the "small hit" in which the "high probability mode" is maintained, the mode shifts to the "time saving performance mode", it is sufficient even when shifting to the "time saving performance mode". Although it is configured so that the player can play a game with a sense of expectation, a player who does not know this will be greatly disappointed. However, in the present embodiment, the "return effect" is performed in a state in which the player has a great sense of disappointment as described above, and the "time saving effect mode" is returned to the "probable variation effect mode". Therefore, the player's mood rises from a disappointing (depressed) state to a happy state at a stretch, which can give the player a great deal of joy and uplifting. As a result, the interest for the player can be dramatically improved. It should be noted that even a player who knows that the “high-probability mode” can be maintained even when shifting to the “time saving effect mode” can feel a sufficiently large satisfaction and uplifting feeling. In other words, if the player shifts to the "time saving effect mode", the player may feel a little anxiety that "it may have shifted to the low-probability mode." The anxiety is dispelled, and the player can obtain a great sense of satisfaction and excitement that "the high probability mode was maintained".

  Furthermore, by providing a "2R regular jackpot" that shifts (falls) to the "low probability mode" as a hit type, it is possible to further increase the occurrence rate of the "2R certainty variation jackpot" that shifts to the "high probability mode". . As a result, the "high probability mode" is more likely to be given when a big hit occurs, and the interest for the player can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the "return processing suggestive effect" can be executed on the decorative symbol display device 42. Therefore, by shifting to the "time saving production mode" with a hit in the "probability change production mode", the player may feel disappointed or anxious, but by performing the "return processing suggestion production", The player who does not know the "return effect" has a great sense of expectation that the feeling of disappointment and anxiety that he has embraced will be alleviated, and that some advantageous state may occur. By performing the "return production" in that state and returning to the "probability variation production mode", the player can obtain a great sense of satisfaction that "the expectation of himself has become a reality". As a result, the interest for the player can be further improved. Further, the player who knows the "return effect" can know that the "return effect" mode is returned to before the "return effect" is executed, and the "high probability mode" is maintained (again, "high probability mode"). It is possible to obtain a sense of security of "shifting to the probability mode" earlier. Therefore, the interest of the player can be further improved. In particular, in the present embodiment, since the "return processing suggestion effect" is performed from the beginning when the "time saving effect mode" is entered, the player feels disappointed and immediately feels a sense of expectation and security. Therefore, even if a decrease in interest due to a sense of disappointment occurs, it can be immediately eliminated, and as a result, the interest can be further improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the "return process suggestion effect" is configured to be executed by winning the game ball to the variable winning device 32 in the small hit state. Therefore, the winning of the game ball to the variable winning device 32 in the small hit state brings benefits to the player such as not only the acquisition of the game ball but also the confirmation of the execution of the "return processing suggestion effect" after the small hit, and The interest can be further improved. In addition, for the player, even if a hit occurs such that the effect mode shifts from the “probabilistic effect effect mode” to the “time saving effect mode” (even if the combination of the regulated symbols is stopped and displayed), in the hit state If it is possible to win the game ball to the variable winning device 32, it seems that it is possible to execute the "return processing suggestion effect" and eventually to return to the "probability variation effect mode". Therefore, in the winning state, it is possible to play a game in which the player wins a game ball to the variable winning device 32, and the interest can be further improved.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the above embodiment, and may be implemented as follows, for example.

  (A) The configuration relating to the upper start winning opening 33A and the lower starting winning opening 33B is not limited to the above embodiment, and other configurations may be adopted.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the "small hit" is generated only when the game ball wins the upper start winning port 33A, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball wins the lower starting winning port 33B. Even in such a case, the "small hit" may occur, and the "small hit" may occur more easily. By configuring such that a "small hit" is generated even when the game ball is won to the lower start winning hole 33B, the player can select "2R short-time big hit" ("2R normal big hit") or "in the probability variation mode". When a "small hit" occurs and the effect mode is changed to the "time saving effect mode", it becomes easier to have a sense of expectation that the "high probability mode" may still be maintained. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game and to improve the interest of the player.

  Further, the winning probability of the “small hit” may be different depending on whether the game ball wins the upper start winning opening 33A and the game ball wins the lower starting winning opening 33B. For example, the winning probability of "small hit" when the game ball wins the lower start winning opening 33B is made higher than the winning probability of "small win" when the game ball wins the upper starting winning opening 33A. May be In this case, in the "probability variation effect mode" in which the game ball is easy to win to the lower start winning opening 33B, "2R hour short jackpot" ("2R normal jackpot") or "small hit" occurs, and the production mode is "time saving. The probability that this shift is due to a "small hit" increases when the shift to the "production mode" is made. Therefore, the player can expect more to maintain the “high probability mode” and can further improve the interest.

  Further, as described above, in the case where the winning probability of “small hit” is set to be greater than that of winning the upper starting winning opening 33A, the winning of the lower starting winning opening 33B is, for example, As shown at 85, two starting winning openings (upper starting winning opening 33A and lower starting winning opening 33B) are arranged in parallel vertically, and the maximum number of game balls to be held in the upper starting winning opening 33A is the maximum number. When it becomes, the game ball that has passed between the two nails (so-called life nails) located directly above the upper start winning opening 33A is not the upper starting winning opening 33A, but the lower starting winning opening 33B below it. It may be configured to be guided to (for example, refer to the example below). As a result, even in the "low support mode" where it is usually difficult for the game ball to win the upper start winning port 33B, the game ball easily wins the lower starting winning port 33B, and the "small hit" is more likely to occur. It tends to occur. Therefore, since the effect mode can be easily shifted to the “latent probability effect mode”, the game is less likely to get tired, and the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, the player can get more chances of win / win lottery, and the interest can be improved. On the other hand, the above-mentioned winning of the game ball to the lower start winning port 33B is when the number of holdings of the game ball to the upper starting winning port 33A is the maximum and is located immediately above the upper starting winning port 33A. Since it occurs only when the game ball passes through the two nails, the player cannot obtain an excessive number of chances of win / loss, and the disadvantage on the hall side is sufficiently small.

  As a configuration in which the game ball that has passed between the two nails located immediately above the upper starting winning opening 33A is guided to the lower starting winning opening 33B, for example, the following configuration can be given. That is, as shown in FIG. 85, a game ball that extends from directly below the upper start winning opening 33A (a hole formed in the game board) toward the front and passes through the two nails is placed on the upper starting winning opening 33A ( A guide member 37b (portion shown by a dotted line in FIG. 85) that can be guided to a hole formed in the game board can be retracted from the game board. Then, the guide member 37b is retracted when the number of games balls to be won for the upper start winning port 33A is maximum, so that the game ball that has passed through the two nails is located at the recessed portion of the guide member 37b. For example, it is possible to pass through the electric accessory 37 to the lower start winning port 33B. Also, during the period in which the game ball that has passed between the two nails can be guided to the lower start winning port 33B, from when one game ball is launched until the game ball reaches the upper starting winning port 33A. It may be about the same as the average time required for. In this case, the number of holdings of the game ball to the upper starting winning opening 33A is the maximum, and when the player stops the firing of the gaming ball (the number of holdings of the gaming ball to the upper starting winning opening 33A is the number of holdings). At the maximum, since the lottery opportunity cannot be obtained even if the game ball wins the upper start winning opening 33A, the player often stops the firing of the game ball). It becomes possible to win a prize at the lower start winning opening 33B. In other words, even if the player wins the upper start winning opening 33A, the player can get a lottery opportunity with the game balls that have not been able to get a lottery opportunity. Can be suppressed. Further, as in the above-described embodiment, the jackpot awarded by winning the game ball to the lower starting winning opening 33B is more advantageous than the jackpot awarded by winning the gaming ball to the upper starting winning opening 33A (for example, the jackpot). If the expected value of the game ball that can be obtained in the state is larger), the player actively shoots the game ball even after the number of holdings due to the winning of the game ball to the upper starting winning opening 33A becomes the maximum, and It is possible to play a game in which an advantageous big hit is generated, and as a result, the playability can be further enhanced.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, both the variable display triggered by the winning of the game ball into the upper start winning port 33A and the variable display triggered by the winning of the game ball in the lower starting winning port 33B are suspended. When it is, the variable display triggered by the winning of the game ball to the lower start winning opening 33B is preferentially displayed, and the hold is exhausted, but not limited to this, for example, upper starting The variable display may be configured according to the winning order of the game balls to the winning opening 33A and the lower start winning opening 33B.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the two starting winning openings (upper starting winning opening 33A and lower starting winning opening 33B) are arranged side by side, but the invention is not limited to this. One may be provided, or three or more may be provided. Further, the two starting winning openings may be arranged side by side. The lower start winning opening 33B may be arranged in the right side area of the variable display device unit 35.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the number of prize balls is, for example, 3 when there is a prize for the game ball in the starting winning openings 33A and 33B, and when there is a prize for the game ball in the variable winning device 32. Although the number is set to 15 or the like, the number of prize balls for each winning opening is not limited to this.

  In the above-described embodiment, the jackpot type assigned when the game ball wins the upper start winning opening 33A and the lower starting winning opening 33B wins in the win / loss lottery is different. It is set. Not limited to this, when the game ball wins the upper start winning port 33A and the lower start winning port 33B, the jackpot type that is awarded when winning in the win / loss lottery is the same. You may comprise.

  In the above-described embodiment, due to the game ball passing through the through gate 34, an open lottery is performed to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 37 (lower start winning port 33B), and the open lottery is performed. The electric accessory 37 is configured to be in an open state when the player wins the game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, during the "low support mode", even if the game ball passes through the through gate 34, The accessory 37 is never opened, and during the "high support mode", when the game ball passes through the through gate 34, the electric accessory 37 is always opened without performing an open lottery. It may be configured as a configuration.

  In the above-described embodiment, the electric accessory 37 is configured to be displaceable between the closed state in which the game ball cannot win and the open state in which the game ball can win. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The object 37 is configured to be displaceable between a closed state where the game ball is difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win, and the game ball can be won to the lower start winning port 33B even in the closed state. May be

  The type, content, etc. of (b) are not limited to the above embodiment, and other configurations may be adopted.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the support mode given after the jackpot is different depending on the jackpot type, but is not limited to this. For example, the "high support mode" is always given regardless of the jackpot type. May be

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the "2R regular jackpot" is won in the "probability variation production mode" or the "time saving production mode", the "100 times / high support mode" is set in the same manner as when the "2R time reduction jackpot" is won. Although it is configured to be given, when "2R normal jackpot" is won in "probability variation production mode" or "time saving production mode", it is the same as when "2R normal jackpot" is won in other production modes Alternatively, the "low support mode" may be switched to, and the "high support mode" may not be provided. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to change the added support mode based on the difference in the effect mode, and the processing load can be reduced. It should be noted that this configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. 86, when a negative determination is made in step S206-9-11-18 of the jackpot end setting process (that is, when the "2R normal jackpot" is won), By setting so as to shift to step S206-9-11-25 without passing through the process (process of step S206-9-11-24 in FIG. 29) for determining the "game state determination value Xj" at the present time. realizable.

  In the above-described embodiment, the "high support mode" is given while the special display devices 43L and 43R perform the variable display a predetermined number of times after the completion of various jackpots, or until the next jackpot state occurs. However, the duration of the “high support mode” is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, the duration of the “high support mode” may be different depending on the type of jackpot.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the "short open" of the variable winning device 32 such as "2R normal big hit" and "2R short time big hit" is performed a plurality of times (twice), one of the "short open" is performed. When the three winning game balls are won in the variable winning device 32, the "short opening" is finished, but the invention is not limited to this. The jackpot state may be terminated when the total number of gaming balls that have won the winning device 32 reaches 10.

  Further, in the above embodiment, if the maximum expected number of winnings (specified number K1) to the variable winning device 32 per one opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 32b (one prize state) is “long open”, “10 pieces”. , And “short open”, it is set to “3”. Not limited to this, another number may be set as the maximum expected winning number. In addition, the maximum expected winning numbers of both "long open" and "short open" are set to "8", for example, and the type of opening (difference in operation mode of the opening / closing member per opening / closing operation) Regardless of the above, the maximum expected winning number may be set to the same number.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the "8R probability variable jackpot" or "16R probability variable jackpot" is won, the lottery mode is set to "high probability mode" and "until next time / high support mode" is given. However, the “high support mode” does not necessarily have to be given until next time, and for example, the “high support mode” is given only while the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 150 times). Good. Further, the number of fluctuations to which the “high support mode” is given may be different depending on the type of jackpot. The lottery mode may be changed to the “low probability mode” when the “high support mode” grant period ends, or the “high probability mode” is maintained as it is. You may.

  (C) The opening mode (opening / closing pattern) of the variable winning device 32 is not limited to the above embodiment.

  For example, the once opening mode (opening time) of the opening / closing plate 32b is not limited to the two types of "long opening" and "short opening" in the above-described embodiment. For example, it may be configured to have three or more types of opening modes, such as “medium opening” having a shorter opening time than “long opening” and longer opening time than “short opening”.

  In the above-described embodiment, the opening time (specified time) of the "short opening" is set to "0.4 seconds" which is shorter than the firing cycle "0.6 seconds" of the launching device 60, but "short opening". Is not limited to this, and may be set to a time longer than the firing cycle “0.6 seconds” of the launching device 60, for example. However, if it is too long, the number of prizes will be too large, so it is preferable to set it to about 1.8 seconds or less, which is about three times as long as the firing cycle of “0.6 seconds”.

  Further, the number of executions of the “short open” at the time of occurrence of the “2R normal big hit”, “2R short time big hit”, etc. is not limited to “2 times” in the above embodiment. For example, a relatively long (for example, 1.8 seconds) “short opening” may be performed only once. Furthermore, the maximum winning number M1 of game balls for the variable winning device 32 in the small hit state may be variously changed. Generally, in the small hitting state, the maximum opening time of the variable winning device 32 is set to 1.8 seconds or less, and the maximum possible winning number M1 of the variable winning device 32 is set to 10.

  In addition, when "Small hit" is won in the "Probability variation production mode", the opening time is relatively longer and the number of times of opening is relatively larger than when "Small hit" is won in the other production modes. The game balls may be easily won in the variable winning device 32 by, for example, playing. In this case, the "return process suggestion effect" by winning the game ball to the variable winning device 32 is more likely to be performed, and the player is more likely to obtain the sense of security that the player returns to the "probability variation effect mode".

  Furthermore, the configuration of the variable winning device 32 is not limited to that of the above-described embodiment, but can be changed as appropriate. For example, in a state where the variable winning device 32 has a relatively short opening time, such as when a "small win" is won, a configuration of a displacement member in the variable winning device 32 is facilitated so that a game ball can easily win the variable winning device 32. May be variously changed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 87 (a) to 87 (c), a plate-shaped member 32c that is capable of projecting / retracting from / to the game area and has an inclined upper surface may be used as the displacement member. In this case, not only the game ball that has reached the variable winning device 32 at the moment when the variable winning device 32 is opened, but also the plate when the variable winning device 32 is opened (when the plate-shaped member 32c is submerged). The game ball on the upper surface of the shaped member 32c can also be awarded to the variable winning device 32, so that the player's interest can be improved. Further, in using such a plate-shaped member 32c, as shown in FIGS. 88 (a) to (c), a protrusion 32d that can appear and disappear with respect to the game area is provided immediately above the upper surface of the plate-shaped member 32c. It may be provided. Then, while the protrusion 32d is normally set in the retracted state, the protrusion 32d is projected and retracted together with the plate member 32c only when the "small hit" is won in the "probability variation effect mode". The game ball can be easily put on the upper surface of the plate-shaped member 32c for a longer time, and the game ball can be more easily won in the variable winning device 32. As a result, the "return process suggestion effect" due to the winning of the game ball to the variable winning device 32 is more likely to occur, and the player's interest can be further enhanced. In addition, in order to more reliably exhibit the action, the protrusion 32d may be provided on the upper surface of the plate-shaped member 32c along the flow direction of the game sphere, downstream of the widthwise center of the plate-shaped member 32c. preferable.

  Of course, the “long open” configuration is not limited to the above-described embodiment as in the “short open” configuration, and various configurations different from the above-described embodiments are adopted in terms of the open time, the number of winnings, and the like. can do.

  Further, in the above embodiment, during the opening effect on the display portion 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42, the opening process of the variable winning device 32 (opening / closing plate 32b) is waited, and after the opening effect, the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 32. However, the opening / closing start timing of the variable winning device 32 is not particularly limited. Therefore, for example, the opening effect is omitted, and the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 32 is started in the big hit medium effect (small winning medium effect) that follows the variation stop, that is, the waiting of the opening / closing process in the variable winning device 32 is specifically executed. It may be configured not to be performed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the "opening number counter" is provided to measure the number of times the variable winning device 32 (opening / closing plate 32b) is opened and closed in the hit state, but the "opening number counter" may be omitted. In this case, the lower byte in the "xx round open command" or the "xx round close command" may be configured by the value of the "remaining open number counter", for example.

  (D) In the above-described embodiment, the open pattern when the "small hit" occurs, the open pattern when the "2R certainty variation big hit" occurs, the open pattern when the "2R short-time big hit" occurs, and the "2R normal big hit" The opening pattern is the same as the opening pattern at the time of occurrence of "," but the opening modes may be different. However, in terms of increasing the expectations for winning the "2R probability variation jackpot" (shifting to "high probability mode") and maintaining "high probability mode", it is possible to improve the interest of the player more effectively. It is preferable to use an open pattern in which it is difficult to distinguish between “2R short-time big hit”, “2R probability variation big hit”, “2R normal big hit” and “small hit”.

  (E) The configuration on the board surface of the game board 30 is not limited to the above embodiment.

  In the above embodiment, the through gate 34 and the variable winning device 32 are arranged in the right side region of the variable display device unit 35 (the position where the game ball flowing down the left side region of the variable display device unit 35 cannot reach). However, not limited to this, for example, the through gate 34 may be arranged in the left side region of the variable display device unit 35, or the variable winning a prize device 32 may be arranged below the starting winning holes 33A, 33B. May be

  Further, in the above embodiment, the upper starting winning opening 33A is arranged at a position where the game ball flowing down the right side area of the variable display device unit 35 cannot reach, but flows down the right side area of the variable display device unit 35. The upper start winning hole 33A may be arranged at a position where the game ball can reach. Further, the lower start winning port 33B may be arranged at a position where the game ball flowing down the left side region of the variable display device unit 35 cannot reach.

  In addition, the through gate 34 is arranged only in the left side area of the variable display device unit 35, and both of the starting winning openings 33A, 33B and the variable winning apparatus 32 are arranged in a position where the game ball passing through the left side area can reach. In this case, the player can advantageously proceed with the game by performing "left hitting" in both the "low support mode" and the "high support mode". Therefore, in this case, it is not necessary to provide the instruction display area W2 in the decorative symbol display device 42, and it is not necessary to indicate the recommended firing direction of the game ball to the player.

  Further, in the configuration in which the through gate 34, the start winning holes 33A, 33B, etc. are arranged as described above, even in the "high support mode", the game ball can easily win the upper starting winning hole 33A. Therefore, as in the above-described embodiment, in the configuration in which the "small hit" is caused only by the winning of the game ball to the upper start winning hole 33A, the "small hit" is more likely to occur. In other words, even if one of "2R short-time big hit" ("2R normal big hit") and "small hit" occurs in the "probability variation production mode" and the "time-shortening production mode" is entered, this transition is a "small hit". Is more likely to occur due to Therefore, the player is more likely to have the expectation that the "high probability mode" may still be maintained when the "time reduction effect mode" is entered. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game and to improve the interest of the player.

  (F) The configurations of the special display devices 43L and 43R and the holding lamps 46a and 46b are not limited to those in the above embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the special display devices 43L and 43R and the holding lamps 46a and 46b may be provided at positions other than the lower corners of the game area such that they are hard to see and conspicuous to the player other than the lower corners of the game area. In addition, the special display devices 43L and 43R and the holding lamps 46a and 46b are provided at positions where they can be easily seen by the player, and their display portions are made relatively large, and the time during which the characters for discrimination are stopped and displayed is relatively long. You may do it.

  (G) The display effect, display mode, and the like on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 are not limited to those in the above embodiment.

  For example, when the big hit information or the small hit information is stored in one of the holding areas of the sub-variation holding area, for example, by setting the holding images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4 as images of a mode different from the normal mode. The player may be informed or suggested that a big hit or a small hit will occur. Note that the jackpot or the small hit may be notified only when a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as when a lottery is carried out for notifying the big hit or the small hit.

  Further, for example, the holding lamps 46a, 46b may be changed in lighting color or blinked to notify or suggest a big hit or a small hit. Further, on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42, for example, an explicit display indicating the occurrence of a big hit or a small hit, or a suggestive display such as "I'm sorry" may be configured. Further, in addition to or instead of the notification or suggestion of the big hit or the small hit in the decorative pattern display device 42, the speaker SP may be used to give a notice or a suggestion by voice or the like. It may be configured to make a suggestion.

  In addition, regardless of the case where the big hit information and the small hit information are stored in the holding area, the effect lottery is separately performed, and the pseudo big hit or the small hit is notified or suggested based on the lottery result. Good. By combining such a configuration with the configuration of the above-described embodiment, it is possible to perform an effect of disguising the winning of the big hit or the small hit, and further improve the interest.

  (H) The command transmitted from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 262 or the like is not limited to the above-exemplified command.

  For example, the "ending command" is configured to include the "gaming state determination value Xj", and the sub control device 262 that receives the "ending command" is based on the "gaming state determination value Xj" included in the received "ending command". Then, the effect mode on the display section 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 may be changed to the display control device 45.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the “variation pattern command” and the “symbol command” are output from the main control device 261 at the start of variation display, and the “variation pattern command” serves as a variation start command. Therefore, the information corresponding to the "variation pattern command" and the "design command" is directly written in the sub-execution area. Not limited to this, for example, a configuration in which these commands are output in advance together with the hold control command, etc., are stored in advance in a predetermined hold area of the sub change hold area, and a change start command is output separately at the start of change display. May be

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the confirmation command for stopping display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is not output to the sub-control device 262, but the confirmation command may be output. By doing so, the stop timings of the special display devices 43L, 42R and the decorative symbol display device 42 can be more reliably synchronized. However, with respect to the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42, since the sub-control device 262 has already determined by the “symbol command” and the “variable pattern command” output at the start of the variable display, the decorative symbol display device 42 is again displayed. It is not necessary to add information regarding the stop mode of.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the "return command" and the "variation pattern command" are configured to include the "gaming state determination value Xj", but the invention is not limited to this, and the "gaming state determination value" is included in other commands. Xj "may be included. In the configuration of outputting a command (confirmation command) or the like for confirming the stop when the fluctuation is stopped, the confirmation command or the like may include the “game state determination value Xj”.

  (I) The configurations of various tables such as the variation pattern table are not limited to those in the above embodiment.

  (J) You may implement as a pachinko machine of a type different from the above-mentioned embodiment. For example, as a pachinko machine that does not switch the winning support mode (“high support mode” or “low support mode”) but only the lottery mode (“high probability mode” or “low probability mode”). Good. Further, instead of or in addition to the payout of prize balls, a pachinko machine having a configuration in which points corresponding to prize balls obtained by a player are given to a storage medium such as a magnetic card may be implemented.

  In addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine can be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, and game machines in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated. Incidentally, in the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and by operating the stop button, the symbol is stopped and confirmed. It is a thing. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

  Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a variable display means for variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbols is provided, and a handle for launching a game ball. Those that do not have. In this case, after the insertion of a predetermined amount of game balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or the predetermined The fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the passage of time, and the jackpot state advantageous to the player is generated on condition that the definite symbol at the time of stopping is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player has a lower saucer. A lot of game balls are paid out.

  (K) The configuration related to “small hit” is not limited to the above-described embodiment.

  For example, like the “big hit”, a plurality of types of “small hits” may be provided. In addition, the variation pattern table selected in the subsequent display control processing relating to the variation display may be configured differently depending on the winning small hit type.

  Here, for example, the reach effect is likely to occur, or the variation time for one time becomes long, and the number of variation display executions per unit time in the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative pattern display device 42) becomes smaller. A fluctuation pattern table can be selected. When such a variation pattern table is selected, for example, a lot of reach production is executed, one variation time is lengthened, or the like to make the player feel that it may be the "latent mode". Thus, by increasing the player's expectation regarding the variable display, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  On the contrary, for example, the reach effect is less likely to occur, or the variation time is shortened once, and the number of variation display executions per unit time in the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative pattern display device 42) is increased. A fluctuation pattern table can be selected. When the "small hit" occurs, the variable display is stopped, and accordingly, the number of times of variable display per unit time is reduced. On the other hand, when the variation pattern table is selected after the "small hit" is finished, the time required to execute the variable display a predetermined number of times is longer than that when the "small hit" does not occur. Instead, the time loss caused by the occurrence of the "small hit" can be recovered.

  In addition, the winning probability of the "small hit" may be changed when the "small hit" occurs.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in the case of "small hit", a special symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area of the decorative symbol display device 42, or a combination of the prescribed symbols is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. Although it is configured to be stopped and displayed, the stop symbol at the time of "small hit" winning is not limited to this. For example, when a "small hit" occurs, a special symbol may be always stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area, or a combination of prescribed symbols may be always displayed.

  Further, the combination of the prescribed symbols in the above embodiment is an example, and the symbol displayed as the combination of the regulated symbols can be appropriately changed.

  (L) In the above embodiment, the information transmitting means is configured by the decorative symbol display device 42 or the like that performs the “return effect”, but the information transmitting means may be configured by a device other than the decorative symbol display device 42. . For example, the speaker SP that notifies or suggests the return to the "probability variation mode" by voice or the like, or various lamps that notify or suggests the return to the "probability variation mode" by light emission may constitute the information transmitting means. .

  (M) In the above embodiment, the "ordinary effect mode", "time saving effect mode", "substantiation effect effect mode" and "probability variation effect mode" are provided as effect modes, but each effect mode has a plurality of effects. A mode may be provided. For example, a plurality of effect modes may be provided as the "time saving effect mode", or a plurality of effect modes may be provided as the "latent probability effect mode". When a plurality of effect modes are provided in the "time saving effect mode", when a "small hit" occurs in the "probable change effect mode", a specific effect mode among the plurality of effect modes is changed to "probable change". It may be configured such that it is easier to be selected in the "production mode" than when "2R short-time big hit" or the like occurs.

  (N) The effects performed by the decorative symbol display device 42 in the winning state, such as the “opening effect” in the above embodiment, are merely examples, and the effects performed are not particularly limited. Further, for example, the “opening effect” or the like may be one in which a predetermined effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 as in the above embodiment, or in accordance with the display on the decorative symbol display device 42. It may be one that sounds a predetermined sound effect, or activates a predetermined accessory, lamp, LED, or the like.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, when the "probable variation production mode" is selected as "2R short-time big jackpot" ("2R normal big jackpot") or "small hit", the production mode from the next change is the same. Has been done. However, the effect mode from the next change when the "2R hour / short win" is won and the effect mode from the next change when the "small win" is won may not be exactly the same. They may be similar or confusing to the point of recognizing the same, unless the player looks and listens carefully. For example, a part of the display image (for example, display object or color) may be slightly different (may be different at all times, may be different only at the time of change, or may be different only at the time of change). , If there is a difference in the extent that the player recognizes that they are in the same effect mode unless the player is particularly conscious of it, such as the timing of generating the sound effect or the operation timing of the accessory, etc., there is a slight difference between both effect modes. There may be differences.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the effects performed in the hit state, “Opening effect”, “Big hit medium effect” (“Small hit medium effect”) and “Ending effect” are mentioned, but all of these effects are necessarily performed. No need. For example, only the "opening effect" and the "ending effect" may be provided, and the "opening effect" may include the "big hit medium effect" ("small hit medium effect"). It should be noted that this configuration can be realized, for example, by setting the sub control device 262 so as to perform the “opening effect” between the reception of the “opening command” and the reception of the “ending command”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the sub-control device 262 receives the "xx round opening command" and the "xx round closing command", so that the decorative symbol display device 42 alternately performs the opening effect and the closing effect. As a result, the decorative pattern display device 42 is configured to give a big hit medium performance, for example, by receiving the "xx round opening command", the following is performed regardless of the presence or absence of the "xx round closing command". Until the "xx round opening command" is received, the production in which the production during opening and the production during closing are continuous (xx round production) may be performed. In addition, when the big hit medium performance such as "2R probability variation big hit" or "2R normal big hit" is relatively short, other "xx round opening command" or "xx round closing command" is received by receiving "1 round opening command". It may be configured to continuously perform the big hit midway effect until the "ending command" is received, regardless of whether or not "is present".

  Further, the execution of the “small hitting performance” may be configured in the same manner as above. For example, by receiving the "xx opening eye command", regardless of the presence or absence of the "xx closing eye command", until the next "xx opening eye command" is received, the production during opening and the production during closing are continuously performed. It may be configured such that a new production (xx open-eye production) is performed. In addition, by receiving the "1st opening command", regardless of the presence or absence of other "xx opening command" or "xx closing command", until the "ending command" is received, the small hit medium performance is continuously performed. It may be configured so as to be carried out.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the “8R probability variable jackpot” or the “16R probability variable jackpot” is won, different open productions are performed in each round, but it is opened in some of each round. A common production may be performed as the middle production, or a common open production may be performed in all of the rounds. In this case, it is possible to reduce the time and effort for creating the effect and reduce the data capacity.

  (O) In the above embodiment, the "return processing suggestion effect" is executed if one or more game balls are won in the variable winning device 32 in the small hit state. The number of winning game balls that can be executed can be changed as appropriate. For example, a lottery may be performed at the time of winning the “small hit”, and the number of winning game balls that allows execution of the “return processing suggestion effect” may be set for each “small hit”. The number of winnings to be set may be 0 (that is, as a result of the lottery, even if there is no winning of the game ball to the variable winning device 32, the "return process suggesting effect" is set to be executed. May be).

  Further, in the above embodiment, the "return processing suggestion effect" is configured to be executable when the game ball is won to the variable winning a prize device 32 in the small hit state, but the "return processing suggestion effect" is executed. The execution condition of is not limited to this. For example, "return processing suggestive effect" is always performed regardless of whether or not a game ball is won for the variable winning device 32 [for example, the processing of step S206-14-5-5 (see FIG. 33) is omitted, and " The "return processing suggestion command" is always set].

  Further, it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not a game ball is won to the variable winning device 32, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, a "return process suggestion effect" is performed (for example, FIG. 89). As shown in FIG. 5, only when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the process of step S206-14-5-A, the process proceeds to step S206-14-5-6 and the "return process suggestion command" is set). You may. Furthermore, the predetermined condition is checked only when the game ball is won in the variable winning device 32 in the "small hit" state, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the "return process suggestion effect" is performed. It may be configured as follows. Further, when either one of the winning of the game ball to the variable winning device 32 in the small hit state and the satisfaction of the predetermined condition is satisfied, the "return processing suggestion effect" is performed. You may comprise. The predetermined condition may be, for example, whether or not a predetermined counter value (a value of the random number counter C1 or the like) is equal to a preset predetermined value, and the counter value is larger or smaller than the predetermined value. It is possible to cite whether or not to determine whether or not it is present.

  Furthermore, depending on the gaming state (for example, the number of consecutive jackpots or the number of fluctuations from the winning of the jackpot (“8R certainty variation jackpot” or “16R certainty variation jackpot”) to the winning of the “small jackpot”) You may comprise so that the execution condition of "production" may be changed. In this case, the generation condition of the "return processing suggestive effect" becomes more random, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, the mode of the “return process suggestive effect” in the above embodiment is an example, and the mode of the “return process suggestive effect” is not limited to that of the above embodiment. As the “return processing suggestive effect”, for example, during a period from “small hit” to “return effect”, the accessory operates at a timing not normally operating, a predetermined sound is emitted from the speaker SP, a lamp, a lamp, or the like. You may perform the effect that the operation mode of the light emitting means such as the LED is different from that in the normal time.

  In addition, a variation pattern table (special small variation) different from the variation pattern table selected when the "small hit" is won in the "probability variation production mode" and selected when "small hit" is won in the other production modes The variation pattern table for winning is prepared, and the variation pattern table for special small hits is selected during the period from when the mode is changed to the "time saving production mode" until the "return production" is performed, whereby "return processing" is performed. It may be configured such that "indication production" is performed. For example, in the special small hit variation pattern table, the reach effect is likely to occur or the variation time for one time becomes long, and the variation per unit time in the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative pattern display device 42). It may be a variation pattern table in which the number of display executions is smaller. The occurrence of "return production" can be suggested to the player by changing the variation mode such as "reach is likely to occur" from the time of winning such as "2R short-term big hit", and the "probability variation production mode" in the player. The expectation of returning to can be further increased.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the "return process suggesting effect" is configured to be executed from the beginning when the "shortening effect mode" after the small hit is entered, but the execution timing of the "return effect" can be changed as appropriate. Is. For example, in the "ending effect" after the small hit, a "return process suggesting effect" such as displaying a character that is not displayed in the normal "ending effect" may be performed. In addition, in the small hitting performance, a "return processing suggesting effect" such as displaying a character that is not displayed in the normal "small hitting performance" may be performed. In the case of performing the "return processing suggestion effect" in the "small hitting performance", the "return processing suggestion command" based on the winning of the game ball to the variable winning device 32 cannot be set. 90, for example, as shown in FIG. 90, when the "first opening command" is set in the small hit special state start processing (S206-13-A: YES), the current production mode is "probability variation production". Mode ”(that is, the“ game state determination value xj ”is“ 4 ”) and the predetermined condition is satisfied in the lottery or the like (S206-13-B: YES, S206-13-C: YES). The "return processing suggestion command" may be set in step S206-13-D.

  Further, for example, the main control device 261 is configured to transmit the information regarding the execution timing of the “return effect” (the value of the “return counter”) from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 262, and the sub control device 262 is transmitted. Based on the information, “return processing suggestion” such as displaying a predetermined character on the display unit 42a until the “return effect” is changed from a predetermined number of times until the “return effect” is executed You may comprise so that "production" may be performed.

  In addition, for example, from the beginning of the "time saving effect mode" after a small hit, or after a predetermined number of variable displays after the "time saving effect mode" has been reached until the "return effect" is executed. During a certain period, a predetermined character is displayed only when a predetermined change occurs (for example, when the number of changes until the "return effect" reaches a predetermined number) (for example, the character is displayed at a certain change time). However, the "return processing suggestion effect" (for example, the character is not displayed at the time of other changes) may be executed.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIGS. 91 to 94, an effect (“return process lottery effect”) that excites the player's interest, such as determining whether or not the above “return process” is performed, is performed. May be. When the lottery is won in the “return process lottery effect”, the decorative symbol display device 42 executes the “return effect” in which the transition to the “probability variation effect mode” is explicitly shown, as shown in FIG. 83. In FIG. 91, the display unit 42a displays a needle that rotates about the center of the display unit 42a as a rotation axis, and a result display region divided into a success region and a failure region along the rotation direction. The "return processing lottery effect" indicates that the lottery is won when the hands stop in the success area and the lottery is not won when the hands stop in the failure area. 92 shows an example of an effect when a lottery is performed, FIG. 93 shows an example of an effect when the lottery of FIG. 92 is won, and FIG. 94 is a non-winning lottery of the FIG. 92. It is an example of an effect in the case.

  Further, during the "time saving production mode" of the "low probability mode", that is, even when the "2R time reduction jackpot" ("2R normal jackpot" is won in the "probability variation production mode", the "return" in the decorative symbol display device 42 It may be configured to perform "processing lottery effect." In this case, the player is in "high probability mode" or "low probability mode" depending on whether or not there is "return processing lottery effect" ("return effect". Whether or not "is executed" cannot be distinguished, and since it can be expected to maintain the "high probability mode", it is possible to improve interest.

  The "return process lottery effect" can be executed as follows, for example. That is, when executing the "return process lottery effect" in the main control device 261, first, as shown in FIG. 95, in the case of winning the "2R hour / hour jackpot" in the "probability variation effect mode" (step S206-9-). 11-A: YES), the "return counter" is set (step S206-9-11-B), and the "false return flag" is turned on (step S206-9-11-C). ) Try it. The "false return flag" is state determination information used when determining whether or not to execute the return process (S205-16-8) in Fig. 96 described below. Further, as shown in FIG. 96, when the "return flag" or the "false return flag" is turned on in step S205-16-7 of the change end time setting process, the return process (S205-16-8) is executed. Configure to run. In addition, as shown in FIG. 97, when the "return counter" is "0" in the return processing, the "return processing" is performed in step S205-16-8-B or step S205-16-8-D. A command ("return processing lottery effect command") for executing "lottery effect" is set. More specifically, the “return processing lottery effect command” includes information regarding the lottery result, and when the “return flag” is on (S205-16-8-A: YES), the lottery result is determined to be winning. The “return process lottery effect command” (success command) including the information to be set is set (S205-16-8-B). On the other hand, when the “false return flag” is on (S205-16-8-A: NO, S205-16-8-C: YES), information that the lottery result is non-winning is included. The “return processing lottery effect command” (failure command) is set (S205-16-8-D). Furthermore, when the "return flag" is on (S205-16-8-A: YES), the "return process lottery effect command" is set, and the "return effect command" is set and the "game state determination value Xj" is set. Is set to "4" (processing (S205-16-8-3 to 6) in which the effect mode is set to "probable variation effect mode" is executed, while the "false return flag" is on (S205- 16-8-C: YES), these processes are not performed, and only the "false return flag" off process (S205-16-8-E) is performed. , "Return processing lottery effect" can be executed when "small hit" or "2R short-time big hit" ("2R normal big hit") occurs in the "probability variation effect mode".

  Further, the "return process lottery effect" may be executed by performing a main process in the sub control device 262. Specifically, the main control device 261 is configured to input information regarding ON / OFF of the “return flag” and the “false return flag” and information regarding the value of the “return counter” from the sub control device 262. I'll do it. Then, when the "return flag" or "false return flag" is on, the "return processing lottery effect command" is set when the value of the input "return counter" becomes "0". At the same time, the set command is output to the display control device 45, and the "return processing lottery effect" is executed on the display unit 42a. When setting the "return processing lottery effect command", the sub control device 262 sets the "return processing lottery effect command" including the information that the lottery result is won when the "return flag" is on. Then, the display control device 45 that has received this command displays that the lottery has been won. On the other hand, when the "false return flag" is on, the sub-control device 262 sets the "return processing lottery effect command" including the information that the lottery result is non-winning, and the display control which has received this command The device 45 will display that the lottery has not been won. The sub-control device 262 can reduce the processing load on the main control device 261 by performing the main process of the “return process lottery effect”.

  Further, the "return process lottery effect" may be configured to be performed a plurality of times. In this case, the interest of the player can be further improved. When the "return processing lottery effect" is performed multiple times with the "return flag" turned on, while the lottery result is won in the last "return processing lottery effect" immediately before the "return effect", In the previous "return process lottery effect", the winning result is non-winning. When the "false return flag" is turned on, the winning result in the "return process lottery effect" is always non-winning.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIGS. 98 and 99, a button display BO indicating that the effect button can be pressed during the lottery effect is displayed on the display unit 42a, and the player operates the effect button 125. By configuring so that the lottery result is displayed, an effect that allows the player to participate in the lottery may be performed.

  Specifically, when the "return processing lottery effect" is executed (when the "return flag" or the "false return flag" is on and the value of the "return counter" is "0") The sub-control device 262 turns on the “button flag” for determining whether or not the operation (input) to the effect button 125 can be accepted, and measures the reception start timing of the input to the effect button 125. It is configured to set a start timer and a reception stop timer that measures the reception stop timing of the input to the effect button 125. In addition, in the normal process (steps S704 to S708) of the sub-control device 262, an effect button process that is periodically performed like the other processes is provided. Here, the effect button processing will be described with reference to FIG. When the "return process lottery effect" is performed a plurality of times, the process of Fig. 100 corresponds to the last "return process lottery effect".

  First, in step S771, it is determined whether the "button flag" is on. If a negative determination is made in step S771, this processing ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S771, the process proceeds to step S772, and whether or not the value of the "reception start timer" is 0, that is, the timing at which the input (operation) to the effect button 125 can be accepted. Is determined.

  When a negative determination is made in step S772, that is, when the reception timing of the input to the effect button 125 has not yet come, the process proceeds to step S773, and the value of the “reception start timer” is decremented by 1. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S772, that is, if the reception start timing of input to the effect button 125 has come, the process moves to step S774.

  In step S774, it is determined whether the "button display flag" is on or off. The "button display flag" is state determination information for determining whether or not the "button display command" described below is set. If an affirmative decision is made in step S774, that is, if the "button display command" has already been set, then the flow shifts to step S777. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S774, that is, if the "button display command" has not been set, then the flow shifts to step S775, and the "button display command" is set. The “button display command” is a command output to the display control device 45 in order to display the button display BO for indicating to the player that the effect button 125 can be pressed on the display unit 42a. When this "button display command" is output to the display control device 45 in the external output process (S710), the display control device 45 causes the display portion 42a of the decorative pattern display device 42 to display the button display BO. From this display, the player can understand that the effect button 125 can be operated.

  Next, in step S776, the "button display flag" is turned on. In a succeeding step S777, it is determined whether or not there is an operation (input) on the effect button 125. When a positive determination is made in step S777, the process proceeds to step S780. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S777, the process proceeds to step S778, the value of the “reception stop timer” is decremented by 1, and whether or not the value of the “reception stop timer” is 0 in step S779. That is, it is determined whether or not the acceptance time of the input to the effect button 125 has elapsed.

  When a negative determination is made in step S779, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S779, then similarly to the case where the operation on the effect button 125 has been carried out (S777: YES), the routine proceeds to step S780, and whether or not the “return flag” is on To determine. If an affirmative decision is made in step S780, then the flow shifts to step S781, and a "return processing lottery effect command" ("success command") including information that the lottery result is to be won is set. By outputting this "success command" to the display control device 45 in the external output process, the display control device 45 displays a message indicating that the lottery has been won on the display section 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 (for example, FIG. 93). ) Is executed.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S780, the process proceeds to step S782, and a "return process lottery effect command" ("failure command") including information that the lottery result is non-winning is set. By outputting this “failure command” to the display control device 45 in the external output process, the display control device 45 displays a display indicating that the lottery is not won in the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 (for example, , FIG. 94) is executed.

  Following the processing of step S781 or step S782, the "button display flag" is turned off in step S783, and the "button flag" is turned off in step S784, and this processing ends.

  In the above, the information regarding the lottery result is configured to be output to the display control device 45 when the input to the effect button 125 is performed or when the input reception time elapses, but the “return process lottery effect” is started. Based on the ON / OFF status of the “return flag” before inputting to the production button 125 or before the input reception time elapses, such as timing to output, information regarding the lottery result is output to the display control device 45 in advance. Good. Then, by transmitting a predetermined command from the sub control device 262 to the display control device 45 when the input to the effect button 125 or the input reception time has elapsed, the display control device 45 responds to the lottery result transmitted in advance. The display may be performed on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42.

  In addition, an effect (“indication lottery effect”) may be performed, in which whether or not the “return process suggestion effect” is performed is determined by a lottery, which excites the player's interest. When the lottery is won in the “indication lottery effect”, the “return processing suggestion effect” (for example, FIG. 84) in which a predetermined character is displayed at the time of change or the like is performed in the decorative symbol display device 42, and the player is presented. On the other hand, it is shown that the "return effect" is executed later.

  In the “indication lottery effect”, for example, the sub-control device 262 that has received the “return effect command”, displays the “indication lottery effect” in the display section 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 before executing the “return effect”. It can be realized by outputting a command to be executed in 1. to the display control device 45. Further, in the "indication lottery effect", an effect similar to the "return processing lottery effect" may be performed.

  In addition, such a "suggestion lottery production" is performed in the "time reduction production mode" after the "small hit" is won, and a predetermined number of times before the "return production" (return processing) occurs. You may go in. For example, in realizing such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 101, first, in the small hit end setting process of step S206-14-5, the initial value setting process of the "return counter" (step S206- 14-5-4) and before the game state notification command setting process (step S206-14-5-9), in step S206-14-5-B, "implication lottery numerical value MC". The setting process of is performed. The “indication lottery numerical value MC” is a value that defines the execution timing of the “indication lottery effect”.

  The initial value of the "return counter" set in step S206-14-5-4 is, for example, a numerical value of 2 or more in the numerical value stored in the jackpot type determination counter buffer (the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2). Is added, and the variable display is displayed to some extent before the "return effect". This is to secure a time when the "return processing suggestive effect" can be executed. In addition, it is configured such that a predetermined value is set as an initial value of the “return counter”, and a value obtained by subtracting a predetermined value from the initial value of the “return counter” is added to the “indication lottery numerical value MC”. It may be configured to be set.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 102, in the return processing of step S205-16-8, following the subtraction processing of the "return counter" (step S205-16-8-1), in step S205-16-8-F. , The value of the “return counter” is equal to the “indication lottery numerical value MC”. That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the "indication lottery effect". Here, when the value of the "return counter" is equal to the "indication lottery numerical value MC" (S205-16-8-F: YES), the process proceeds to step S205-16-8-G and the "indication lottery" is performed. Directing command "is set. The set "instruction lottery effect command" is output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output process, and the sub-control device 262 that has received the "indication lottery effect command" controls the display control device 45. Then, before the "return effect", the "design suggestion lottery effect" is executed in the decorative pattern display device 42. In this aspect, as a result of the "indication lottery effect", it is indicated that the lottery is won and the "return process suggestion effect" and then the "return effect" (return process) is executed, or the lottery is not won. , "Return process suggestion effect" is not performed, and eventually, one of those showing a result as if "return effect" (return process) is not performed is displayed.

  It should be noted that whether the winning or non-winning is displayed as the lottery result of the “indication lottery effect” may be determined by the main control device 261 or the sub control device 262.

  The determination of the lottery result of the “indication lottery effect” in the main control device 261 can be realized by the following method, for example. That is, the main control device 261 is a "suggestion lottery effect command" (success command) for causing the decorative symbol display device 42 to execute an effect that is a winning result in the lottery result, and the decorative symbol display device 42 does not win the lottery result. At least two types of “instruction lottery effect command” (failure command) for executing the effect to be performed are stored in advance. Then, by setting one of the success command and the failure command as the “indication lottery effect command”, the determination of the lottery result in the main control device 261 can be realized. Which of the success command and the failure command is set is determined by the on / off status of the "return flag". The success command can be set only when the "return flag" is on, and only the failure command is set when the "return flag" is off. However, it is not always necessary to set the success command when the "return flag" is on, and a configuration may be such that a failure command can be set. When the success command is output, the “return process suggestion command” is also output from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 262, and after the winning result is displayed, the “return process suggestion effect” is displayed. Will be executed. On the other hand, when the failure command is output as the "indication lottery effect command", the display indicating that the lottery result is non-winning is executed, and the "return process suggestion effect" is not executed. Even if the failure command is output, the "return effect" is executed as long as the "return flag" is on.

  Further, the determination of the lottery result of the “indication lottery effect” in the sub control device 262 can be realized by the following method, for example. That is, the sub-control device 262, the "suggestion lottery effect command" (success command) that is output to the display control device 45 in order to cause the decorative symbol display device 42 to execute the effect that the lottery result is won, and the lottery result. In advance, at least two types of commands, that is, the "indication lottery effect command" (failure command) that is output to the display control device 45 in order to cause the decorative symbol display device 42 to execute the effect that is not won, are stored in advance. . Further, the main control device 261 is configured to receive information regarding ON / OFF of the “return flag”. Then, when the information indicating that it is the execution timing of the "indication lottery effect" is input from the main control device 261, the sub control device 262 is configured to select the success command or the failure command. As a result, it is possible to realize the determination of the lottery result of the “indication lottery effect” in the sub control device 262. The success command can be selected only when the "return flag" is on, and the failure command is selected when the "return flag" is off. When the success command is selected, the "return processing suggestion command" is output from the sub control device 262 to the display control device 45 together with the success command, and the decorative symbol display device 42 displays a message indicating that the lottery has been won. Then, "return process suggestion effect" is executed. On the other hand, when the failure command is selected, the decorative symbol display device 42 displays that the lottery has not been won.

  Further, also in the “indication lottery effect”, the operation of the effect button 125 by the player may be involved.

  Further, the initial value of the “return counter” and the information regarding the on / off of the “return flag” are output to the sub control device 262, and when the “return flag” is on in the sub control device 262. , The "return counter" is set based on the initial value of the "return counter", and the "suggestion lottery effect command" setting process corresponding to steps S205-16-8-F, G is performed. You may. That is, the sub-control device 262 may be configured to perform most of the processing relating to the “indication lottery effect”, instead of the main control device 261.

  Furthermore, in step S206-14-5-B, a plurality of values may be set in the "indication lottery numerical value MC" (note that when setting a plurality of values in the "indication lottery numerical value MC", " The initial value of the "return counter" is set to a value larger than the number of "indication lottery numerical values MC" that are set). In this case, the "suggestion lottery effect" is performed a plurality of times, which can improve the interest of the player.

  When the "return flag" is turned on and the "indication lottery production" is performed multiple times, the lottery result is won in the last "indication lottery production" immediately before the "return production", but before that. In the "indication lottery effect", the winning result may be non-winning. This is because, for example, in the configuration in which the main control device 261 performs the main processing of the "indication lottery effect", the value of the "return counter" is the "indication lottery numerical value MC" in step S205-16-8-F. It can be realized by setting the “instruction lottery effect command” that makes the lottery result win in step S205-16-8-G only when it becomes equal to the smallest number.

  When the lottery result is won in the “Suggestion lottery production”, the “Suggestion lottery numerical value MC” is set to a value larger than the initial value of the “Return counter” in the main control device 261 and the sub control device 262. To be done. As a result, for example, after the winning result is obtained in the "indication lottery effect", the "indication lottery effect" before the execution of the "return effect" is stopped.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 103, as a "return process suggestion effect", an effect that displays the remaining number of fluctuations until the "return effect" is performed in order to raise the interest of the player ("return processing suggestion effect") The remaining number display effect ") may be performed. In FIG. 103, the number of remaining fluctuations until the number “return effect” between “after” and “day” is executed means, for example, “50 days left” means “return effect”. It means that the remaining number of fluctuations before executing "" is 50 times, and if "5 days left", it means that the number of remaining fluctuations is 5. The "return processing remaining number display effect" is, for example, on the display unit 42a of the decorative pattern display device 42, every time the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, every five variable displays are performed). The number of fluctuations may be displayed, or the remaining number of fluctuations may be displayed so as to decrease by one each time fluctuation stops.

  The "return processing remaining number display effect" can be realized as follows, for example. That is, in the variable display setting of step S205-7, it is determined whether the value of the "return counter" is equal to the "remaining number display numerical value" before the process of step S205-7-1. When the value of the "return counter" is equal to the "remaining number display numerical value", the "return processing remaining number display command" is set. The "return processing remaining number display command" includes the value of the "return counter" when the command is set. The "remaining number display numerical value" is a value for defining the execution time of the "return processing remaining number display effect", and for example, steps S206-14-5-3 to S206-14-5 in the return processing. A predetermined numerical value is set in the process between -9. In addition, when executing the "return processing remaining number display effect", it is preferable to set a relatively large initial value of the "return counter" in order to secure the execution time of the effect.

  Then, the set "return processing remaining number display command" is output to the sub control device 262 in the external output process, and the sub control device 262 which has received the command causes the display control device 45 to "return processing remaining number display effect". The command for executing the command is set, and the set command is output to the display control device 45. The set command includes information corresponding to the value of the "return counter" included in the "return processing remaining number display command". As a result, in the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42, an effect of displaying the value of the "return counter", that is, the number of remaining fluctuations until the "return effect" is performed ("return processing remaining number display effect"). ) Can be performed. For example, when 5 and 10 are set as the “remaining number display numerical value”, “10” is displayed as the remaining number of fluctuations in the variable display 10 before the “return effect” is performed, In the variable display five times before the "return effect" is performed, "return processing remaining number display effect" that displays "5" as the remaining number of fluctuations can be executed. Further, for example, when 1, 2, and 3 are set as the "remaining number display effect", in the variable display three, two, and one before the "return effect" is performed, A "return process remaining number display effect" that displays "3", "2", and "1" as the remaining number of fluctuations can be executed.

  Further, when executing the "return processing remaining number display effect", the sub-control device 262 may be configured to mainly perform the processing. For example, the main control device 261 outputs to the sub control device 262 the information regarding the on / off of the “return flag” and the initial value of the “return counter”. Then, the sub control device 262 sets the "remaining number display numerical value" based on the initial value of the "return counter" when the "return flag" is on. Further, every time the "variation pattern command" is input, 1 is subtracted from the initial value of the "return counter", and when the numerical value obtained by the subtraction is equal to the "remaining number display numerical value". , And sets a command for executing the “return processing remaining number display effect” and outputs the set command to the display control device 45. As a result, the sub-control device 262 can execute the "return process remaining number display effect" on the decorative symbol display device 42 while performing the main process.

  The various "return processing suggestive effects" described above may be appropriately combined.

  Further, the "return processing remaining number display effect" is not limited to the one executed in the decorative symbol display device 42, and is executed by a plurality of light emitting means such as LEDs provided around the decorative symbol display device 42 and the speaker SP. You may. When the light emitting means is used, for example, the plurality of light emitting means are turned on when the remaining number of variations until the "return effect" is executed reaches a preset number of times, and each time the variation is stopped. Alternatively, the light emitting means may be turned off by a predetermined number (for example, one by one), and all the light emitting means may be turned off immediately before the "return effect". Further, when the remaining number of fluctuations until the "return effect" is executed reaches a preset number of times, the plurality of light emitting means are turned off, and a predetermined number of light emitting means is added each time the fluctuation is stopped. It may be configured to turn on (for example, one by one) so that all of the light emitting means are turned on immediately before the "return effect". Further, when the speaker SP is used, for example, the variation occurs between when the remaining number of variations until the “return effect” is executed reaches a preset predetermined number of times until immediately before the “return effect”. At the start or when the fluctuation is stopped, a voice or the like indicating the remaining number of fluctuations until the "return effect" is executed may be emitted from the speaker SP. The various effects described above as the "return processing remaining number display effect" may be appropriately combined.

  Further, the "return processing lottery effect" is not limited to the above-described effect, and, for example, the decorative symbol display area 42 and the light emitting means such as an LED provided in a ring around the decorative symbol display area 42 are cooperated. It may be executed by working. For example, as shown in FIG. 104, in the decorative symbol display area 42, items (for example, success, failure, etc.) corresponding to the lottery result are displayed in a ring. Then, by adjusting the turning on / off timing of the light emitting means provided around the decorative symbol display area 42, an effect as if light is moving around the decorative symbol display area 42 is produced. Then, the movement of the light is finally stopped, and the result of the lottery is determined by the position of the stopped light (for example, the position on the imaginary line connecting the center of the decorative symbol display area 42 and the stopped light). The item indicates the lottery result). In this case, the production is performed using a wide range of the game area, and the interest of the player can be improved. Note that both the "return processing lottery effect" using the decorative symbol display area 42 and the light emitting means and the "return processing lottery effect" (see FIG. 89) using the decorative symbol display area 42 described above are executed. It may be configured as possible. In this case, the execution probabilities of the former "return process lottery effect" and the latter "return process lottery effect" may be different depending on the lottery mode. For example, when the lottery mode is the “high probability mode” (when the “return effect” is executed), the former “return processing lottery effect” is more likely to be executed than when it is the “low probability mode”. You may comprise. In this case, the former "return process lottery effect" (that is, "return process lottery effect" using a wider area) is performed, so that the "return effect" is not given to the player. It is possible to make the player feel a strong sense of expectation, and to further enhance the interest of the player.

  (P) In the above embodiment, when a “small hit” occurs in the “probability variation effect mode” and a return effect is executed, the value of the “support counter” is not reset, and the sub control device 262 does , "High support mode" is configured to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 as dummy information as if it corresponds to the remaining number of fluctuations. On the other hand, when a "small hit" occurs in the "probability variation effect mode" and the "return effect" is executed, for example, as shown in Fig. 105, step S206-14-5 of the small hit end setting process. In -C, while setting the "support number counter" to the same value (100 times in this example) as the value set when "2R hour / hour jackpot" occurs, as shown in FIG. The value set when "16R certainty variation jackpot" or "8R certainty variation jackpot" occurs in the counter value of the "support number counter" at the stage of executing (in step S205-16-8-H). The same value (for example, “99999” corresponding to the variation display 99999 times) may be reset. In this case, by transmitting the "support count counter" to the sub-control device 262, the value of the "support count counter" is used to display the remaining number of fluctuations to which the "high support mode" is given, as a decorative symbol. It can be displayed on the device 42. Therefore, the information indicating the number of remaining fluctuations to which the "high support mode" that is displayed when the "2R short and big hit" is generated and the remaining that the "high support mode" that is displayed when the "small hit" is generated are added. The information (dummy information) corresponding to the number of times of fluctuations can be acquired from the common “support frequency counter”. This eliminates the need for the sub-control device 262 to perform the process for obtaining the dummy information, thereby reducing the processing load and the data capacity. When resetting the "support counter", the value of the "return counter", that is, the number of fluctuations from "small hit" to "return effect" is set to "2R". It is preferable to make the number smaller than the value (100 times) of the “support number counter” set when the “time saving jackpot” occurs. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the change to the "low support mode" before the "return effect", and the gaming value ("high probability mode") that is given after the "small hit" occurs. Also, it is possible to prevent fluctuations in "until next time / high support mode").

  (Q) In the above-described embodiment, in the “probable variation effect mode”, the “time saving effect mode”, etc., the stages displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 are each one type, but there are a plurality of stages for each effect mode. May be prepared, and one of the plurality of stages may be selected and displayed in each effect mode. The stage selection may be performed by the main control device 261 or the sub control device 262.

  (R) In the above-described embodiment, the “fluctuation pattern command” output from the main control device 261 to the sub-control device 262 includes, for example, as shown in FIG. However, it is configured such that the “variation pattern command” includes only the variation type (eg, hit or miss information) and the variation time, and the sub-control device 262 inputs it. It is also possible to determine the effect mode at the time of the variable display, based on the "variation pattern command" thus generated. This is, for example, when a table stored for the effect mode corresponding to each “fluctuation pattern command” is prepared in advance in the sub control device 262 and the “variation pattern command” is input to the sub control device 262. In addition, the sub-control device 262 is configured to select a table corresponding to the inputted “variation pattern command” from the tables, and to select / determine an effect mode from the selected table. Can be realized with.

  (S) In the above-described embodiment, various processes executed by the main control device 261 may be executed by the sub control device 262. For example, in the above embodiment, the main control device 261 is configured to set the “game state determination value Xj”, the “return effect command”, and the like, but the sub control device 262 configures the “game state determination value Xj”. Alternatively, it may be configured such that a "return effect command" or the like is set.

  Hereinafter, technical ideas that are not described in the claims of the claims and can be grasped from the above-described embodiment will be described together with their effects.

Means 1. A launching means for launching a game ball,
A game area where the launched game balls are guided,
Starting ball entering means arranged in the game area,
First lottery means for performing a first win / loss lot with a first winning probability due to entry of a game ball into the starting entry means.
Second lottery means for performing a second win / loss lottery with a second winning probability due to the entry of the game balls into the starting ball entry means,
A first special game state generating means for generating a first special game state advantageous to the player when a winning result is obtained by the first win / loss lottery,
A mode in which the lottery mode after the end of the first special game state can be switched and set to at least a normal mode and a specific mode in which the first winning probability is higher than the first winning probability in the normal mode. Switching means,
Mode determination means for determining the type of lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state related to the winning result, when a winning result is obtained by the first winning / boring lottery;
Second special game state generation means for generating a second special game state which is less advantageous than the first special game state when a result of the second win / loss lottery is obtained,
Production mode setting means capable of setting the production mode in a predetermined display means to various modes,
Based on the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means, effect control means for controlling the effect on the display means,
Equipped with
A gaming machine in which, when a winning result is obtained by the second winning / absence lottery, the first winning probability when the winning result is obtained is maintained as it is,
The production mode setting means,
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, an effect mode to be set when a winning result is obtained by the second win / loss lottery,
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a winning result is obtained by the first win / loss lottery, and the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state is switched to the normal mode by the mode switching means. When the production mode is set to
A gaming machine characterized in that the same can be set.

  When there are a plurality of "first special game states", the "second special game state" is less advantageous than the first special game state that is most advantageous to the player. For example, in the above embodiment, as a jackpot state corresponding to the "first special game state", "16R certainty variation jackpot", "8R certainty variation jackpot", "2R certainty variation jackpot", "2R time reduction jackpot" and "2R normal jackpot" However, the "second special game state" (the small hit state in the above embodiment) is more advantageous than the "16R probability variation big hit" which is the most advantageous big hit state for the player among the respective big hit states. Anything that doesn't exist.

  Further, "is the same" means that when the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, the effect mode set when the winning result is obtained by the second win / loss lottery and the lottery mode is set to the specific mode. The winning result is obtained by the first win / loss lottery, and the production mode set when the lottery mode after the end of the first special game state is switched to the normal mode by the mode switching means is exactly the same. Not only in the case of the above, but also in the case where there is a slight difference between the two effect modes, there is a case where the effect modes are similar or confusing to the extent that the player cannot recognize unless the player is particularly aware of the difference.

  In recent years, in addition to the first special game state (so-called big hit), there is a gaming machine that generates a second special game state (so-called small hit). The small hit is provided for the purpose of, for example, slightly increasing the number of game balls (held balls) that the player has, and when a small hit occurs, it is less advantageous than the big hit state, but a slightly advantageous state for the player. Occur. In addition, after the small hit state, the big hit winning probability until then is maintained.

  By the way, a small hit state may occur in a specific mode (so-called high probability mode). The occurrence of such a small hitting state is a high-probability mode, and can be meaningless for a player in a state in which a more advantageous large hitting state can be expected to occur than the small hitting state. Further, the occurrence of such a small hit state may reduce the interest of the player.

  In this regard, according to the above means 1, when the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, the winning result is obtained by the second win / win lottery, and the win result is obtained by the first win / win lottery. When the is switched to the normal mode, the subsequent effect modes can be set to the same one. Here, since the first winning probability is high in the specific mode, the player in the specific mode usually plays the game while having a great expectation for the next hit. On the other hand, winning in the first win / loss lottery in the specific mode may invite switching from the specific mode of the lottery mode to the normal mode with a low probability of winning, and the switching of the effect mode accompanying the switching to the normal mode is Normally, the expectation and the like that the player had suddenly disappears, giving the player a great disappointment that "the specific mode has ended". In view of this point, in the above means 1, even if the second winning / winning lottery is won in the specific mode and the lottery mode is maintained in the specific mode, the first winning / winning lottery is won in the specific mode, and the lottery mode is selected. Even when the setting is switched to the normal mode, the effect modes are the same. That is, even if the winning / winning lottery is won in the specific mode and the effect mode is switched and set, the specific mode may be maintained. Then, for the player, since the same production mode will be set after hitting, the second winning / winning lottery is won, and whether the lottery mode is maintained in the specific mode or not, the first winning / winning lottery is won, and the lottery mode is normally set. It becomes difficult to determine whether the mode has been switched to. Therefore, the player is less likely to be disappointed that the mode has been switched to the normal mode, and the player can play the game while fully expecting that the specific mode is still maintained. As a result, the interest for the player can be improved.

  In addition, the starting ball entering means, such as a through gate, is a ball entering means through which a game ball can pass (after the game ball entering itself is detected by a predetermined detecting means, the game ball returns to the game area again. Ball entry means configured as) is also included.

Means 2. When the winning result is obtained by at least one of the both winning / dismissing lottery, an ending effect indicating the effect mode of the display means after the end of the first special game state or the second special game state is performed,
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a win result is obtained by the first win / loss lottery, and the lottery mode after the end of the first special game state is switched to the normal mode by the mode switching means. With the ending effect performed on the display means when set,
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, the ending effect performed on the display means when the winning result is obtained by the second win / loss lottery can be set to the same one. The gaming machine according to means 1, characterized in that.

  According to the above means 2, in the specific mode, when the winning result is obtained by the second win / win lottery, and when the winning result is obtained by the first win / win lottery and the lottery mode is switched to the normal mode, the ending effect is produced. Can be set to the same. Therefore, it becomes more difficult for the player to determine whether the specific mode is maintained or the normal mode is entered. As a result, the interest of the player can be further improved.

  Further, although it is general to separately prepare an ending effect that is performed when a winning result is obtained by the second winning / absence lottery in the specific mode, it takes time and effort to create the effect. On the other hand, the degree of improvement in playability brought about by this ending effect is not so high. Therefore, in consideration of the degree of improvement in playability, it is not preferable to spend labor to create the ending effect.

  In this respect, according to the above means 2, it is not necessary to separately prepare an ending effect that is performed when the winning result is obtained by the second win / loss lottery in the specific mode, and creation of an effect that does not significantly contribute to the improvement of the game playability. Can be avoided. As a result, it is possible to reduce the time and effort required to create the effect without degrading the playability. Further, on the gaming machine side, it is possible to reduce the data capacity and the processing load.

  The action and effect of the means 2 is more effective in the configuration where the winning result is difficult to be obtained by the second winning / winning lottery in the specific mode.

Means 3. When the winning result is obtained by at least one of the both winning / discarding lottery, an effect is performed on the display means during the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state,
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a winning result is obtained by the first win / loss lottery, and an effect executed by the display means while the first special game state occurs,
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a win result is obtained by the second win / loss lottery, and an effect executed on the display means while the second special game state is generated is The gaming machine according to means 1 or 2, wherein the gaming machines can be set to the same one.

  The "effect" in the means 3 includes the "ending effect" in the means 2, and includes the "opening effect", "big hit medium effect" ("small hit medium effect"), and "ending" in the embodiment. "Directing".

  According to the means 3, the winning result is obtained by the first win / win lottery in the specific mode, and the effect executed on the display means while the game is in the first special game state, and the second win / win lottery in the specific mode. A winning result can be obtained, and the same effect can be set as the effect executed on the display means while in the second special game state. Therefore, it becomes more difficult for the player to determine whether the specific mode is maintained or the normal mode is entered, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

  Further, according to the above means 3, it is not necessary to separately prepare an effect that is performed when the winning result is obtained by the second winning / winning lottery in the specific mode, and it is possible to further reduce the time and effort required for creating the effect. Further, on the gaming machine side, it is possible to further reduce the data capacity and the processing load.

  Means 4. When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a winning result is obtained by the second win / loss lottery, and after the effect modes on the display means are the same, the lottery by the first lottery means is performed. When the number of times (that is, the number of times of fluctuations) is equal to or greater than a prescribed number, the information transmission means for emitting information indicating that the lottery mode is set to the specific mode is provided to the player. 4. The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.

  It should be noted that the phrase "the effect mode in the display means is the same as the above" means that, in more detail, when the effect mode in the display means is the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, it is determined by the first winning / disapproving lottery. It means that the winning result is obtained and the same as the effect mode set when the lottery mode after the end of the first special game state is switched to the normal mode by the mode switching means. The prescribed number of times includes 0 times.

  According to the means 4 described above, it is indicated by the information transmitting means that the lottery mode is set to the specific mode in a state where it is difficult to determine whether the specific mode is maintained or the normal mode is entered. . Here, according to the means 1, even when the effect mode is switched and set in the specific mode, the specific mode may be maintained, and the effect mode may be switched and set in the specific mode. Even though the player can play the game with a sufficient sense of expectation, for a player who does not know this, switching the effect mode causes a great disappointment. However, according to the means 4, the information transmission means is performed in a state where the player feels a great disappointment as described above, and it is shown that the player is maintained in the specific mode. Therefore, the player's mood rises from a disappointment state to a happy state all at once, and the player can obtain a great deal of joy and satisfaction. As a result, the interest for the player can be dramatically improved.

  In addition, even if the effect mode is switched and set, it is possible for a player who knows that the specific mode can be maintained to have a sufficiently large satisfaction. In other words, if a changeover of production modes occurs in association with winning in the specific mode, the player may feel a little anxious that "it may have transitioned to the normal mode." By showing the maintenance of the mode, the above-mentioned anxiety is eliminated, and the player can obtain a great satisfaction or the like that "the specification is maintained".

Means 5. The stipulated number of times is set based on a counter whose numerical value fluctuates,
The gaming machine according to means 4, wherein the counter is also used for processing other than the setting of the prescribed number of times.

  According to the above-mentioned means 5, the prescribed number of times can be set to different numbers of times, and the information transmission timing of the information can be set to various timings. As a result, the interest for the player can be further enhanced.

  Further, the counter is configured so as to be used both for setting a prescribed number of times and for other processing. Therefore, complication of the device and control processing can be suppressed.

  Means 6. Before the information transmission means issues information indicating that the lottery mode is set to the specific mode to the player, the information transmission means transmits the information to the player. 6. The gaming machine according to means 4 or 5, further comprising suggestable second information transmitting means.

  According to the above means 6, before the information is transmitted by the information transmitting means, the transmission of the information by the information transmitting means is suggested by the second information transmitting means. Therefore, the player has a feeling of disappointment and anxiety because the effect mode is switched and set in accordance with the winning in the specific mode. However, the information of the above-mentioned means 4 is suggested by the information suggested by the second information transmitting means. The player who does not know the calling means has a great sense of hope that the feeling of disappointment and anxiety he has embraced will be alleviated, and that some advantageous state may occur. In this state, information is transmitted by the information transmission means of the above-mentioned means 4 and it is shown that the specific mode is maintained, whereby the player says that his / her expectation has become a reality. You can get great satisfaction. As a result, the interest for the player can be further improved.

  Further, for the player who knows the information transmitting means of the means 4, the player can know that the specific mode is maintained before the information is transmitted by the information transmitting means, and the sense of security that the specific mode is maintained. Can be obtained earlier. Therefore, even if the interest is lowered due to the anxiety that "it may have shifted to the normal mode", it can be eliminated early, and the interest for the player can be further improved.

Means 7. The game ball has an displacing member that can be displaced between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter, and the winning result can be obtained in the first win / loss lottery or the second win / loss lottery. When the displacement member is provided with a specific ball entering means that is in an open state,
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a winning result is obtained by the second win / loss lottery, and when the displacing member is in the open state, a game ball enters the specific ball entering means. 7. If there is, the second information transmission means is capable of suggesting the transmission of the information by the information transmission means, the gaming machine according to means 6.

  According to the above means 7, when the winning result is obtained by the second win / loss lottery, the player can enter not only the game ball paid out by entering the game ball but also the second information by entering the game ball into the specific entering means. It is also possible to obtain a suggestion by the transmitting means (material for determining whether or not the lottery mode is the specific mode). Therefore, the interest of the player can be further improved.

  In addition, even if the player can win the winning / winning lottery that can fall into the normal mode, if the player can enter the game ball into the specific ball entering means, the second information transmitting means causes a suggestion, and eventually Looks like you can get back to a specific mode. Therefore, in the second special game state, it is possible to play a game in which the game ball is positively aimed at the specific ball entering means, and the interest of the player can be further improved.

Means 8. The starting ball entering means comprises a first starting ball entering means and a second starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
The second starting ball entering means is a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter, and an open state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter when a predetermined opening condition is satisfied. Having at least one opening / closing member displaceable between
In the normal mode, it is possible to set a low ball entering state in which the opening / closing condition is difficult to be established,
In the specific mode, it is possible to set a high-ball entry state in which the opening / closing condition is more easily established than the low-ball entry state,
8. The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7, wherein the second win / win lottery is performed only by entering a game ball into the first starting entrance ball means.

  According to the above-mentioned means 8, since it becomes easy to enter both the starting and entering means when the high entering state is set, the frequency of entering the first starting and entering means is relatively reduced. Since the second winning / winning lottery can be generated only by entering the first starting ball entering means, the second winning / winning lottery is won in a high-ball entering state in which it is difficult to enter the first starting ball entering means. Occurs less frequently. Therefore, when a hit occurs during the high-ball entry state of the specific mode and the effect mode is changed, the lottery mode is often switched and set to the normal mode. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to more surely recognize that the lottery mode has changed from the specific mode to the normal mode.

  Further, in the gaming machine like the above-mentioned means 8 in which the winning by the second winning / winning lottery is hard to occur in the high-income state, the frequency of performing the effect (ending effect, etc.) corresponding to the winning is lower, but the means 2 or By adopting the means 3, it is not necessary to prepare such an infrequently executed effect (ending effect, etc.). That is, it is possible to avoid creating an effect that is executed less frequently and contributes less to the improvement of the game play.

Means 9. The first starting ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball emitted by the emitting means can reach so as to pass through at least the first area of the game area,
The second starting entrance ball means is provided at a position where the game ball shot by the shooting means can reach so as to pass through at least a second area of the game area.
9. The means 8 characterized in that the first starting ball entering means is provided at a position where a game ball launched by the launching means so as to pass through the second area cannot enter or is difficult to enter. Game machine.

  According to the above-mentioned means 9, in the high-ball entering state where the opening condition of the second starting ball entering means is easily established, the game ball is usually aimed at the second starting ball entering means and passes through the second area. Fire. Here, in the above-mentioned means 9, the game ball that is shot so as to pass through the second area cannot enter or is difficult to enter the first starting ball entering means. Therefore, the second win / loss lottery, which may occur only by entering the first start-up entering means, is even less likely to occur. Therefore, when a hit occurs during the high-ball entering state of the specific mode and the effect mode is changed, the lottery mode is more often set to be switched to the normal mode. This makes it easier for the player to more surely recognize that the lottery mode has changed from the specific mode to the normal mode.

  Further, according to the above-mentioned means 9, the execution frequency of the effect (ending effect, etc.) corresponding to the winning by the second win / loss lottery in the specific mode is lower, but by adopting the above-mentioned means 2 or 3, It is not necessary to prepare such an effect that is executed very infrequently. That is, it is possible to avoid creating an effect that is executed at a very low frequency and has a lower contribution to the improvement of the game playability.

Means 10. After performing a variable display, a first special display means for performing a stop display in a specific mode based on a lottery result of the winning / winning lottery resulting from the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entering means,
After performing a variable display, a second special display means for performing a stop display in a specific mode based on a lottery result of the winning / winning lottery resulting from the entry of the game ball into the second start entering ball means,
The lottery result of the winning / winning lottery caused by the entry of the game ball into the first start entering ball means is stored, and the variable display executed by the first special display means based on the lottery result is already executed. And a first holding means for waiting until the end of the variable display,
The lottery result of the winning / winning lottery caused by the entry of the game ball into the second start entering ball means is stored, and the variable display executed by the second special display means based on the lottery result is already executed. The second holding means for waiting until after the end of the variable display,
In the case where there is a variable display which is waited by the first holding means and the second holding means, the variable display which is waited by the second holding means is preferentially executed. The game machine described.

  According to the means 10, when the predetermined opening condition is satisfied, more game balls are easily entered into the second starting ball entering means, and a variable display relating to the ball entering is displayed. Since the first priority winning lottery and the second winning lottery lottery can be executed in a shorter period of time, the first special gaming state and the second special gaming state can be made more in a shorter period of time because the priority can be consumed. It will be easier to win.

  In addition, since the winning / winning lottery associated with the ball entering the second starting ball entering means is preferentially performed, the winning in the second winning / winning lottery by entering the first starting ball entering means is less likely to occur. As a result, when a hit occurs during the specific mode and the effect mode is changed, the player can more reliably recognize that the lottery mode has transitioned from the specific mode to the normal mode.

  Furthermore, according to the above means 10, the execution frequency of the effect corresponding to the winning of the second win / loss lottery is further reduced. However, by adopting the above means 2 or 3, such an effect that the execution frequency is extremely low is achieved. There is no need to prepare. That is, it is possible to avoid creating an effect that is extremely low in execution frequency and has a lower degree of contribution to the improvement of playability.

Means 11. The starting ball entering means comprises a first starting ball entering means and a second starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
The second starting ball entering means is a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter, and an open state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter when a predetermined opening condition is satisfied. Having at least one opening / closing member displaceable between
In the normal mode, it is possible to set a low ball entering state in which the opening / closing condition is difficult to be established,
In the specific mode, it is possible to set a high-ball entry state in which the opening / closing condition is more easily established than the low-ball entry state,
The second winning / non-winning lottery is performed due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting entry ball means and the entry of the game ball into the second starting entry ball means. The gaming machine according to any one of 1 to 7.

  According to the above means 11, since the second winning / winning lottery can be generated by entering both the starting and entering means, the occurrence frequency of the winning in the second winning / winning lottery in the specific mode in which the high entering state can be set. Get higher Therefore, when the first win / win lottery or the second win / win lottery is won in the specific mode, the probability that the win is due to the second win / win lottery is increased, and thus the probability that the specific mode is maintained is increased. Therefore, the player is more likely to have the expectation that the specific mode is still maintained. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game and to further improve the interest of the player.

  Means 12. The second winning probability used in the second win / loss lottery resulting from the entry of the game ball into the second starting entry ball means results from the entry of the game ball into the first starting entry ball means. The gaming machine according to means 11, which has a higher probability than the second winning probability used in the second winning / winning lottery.

  According to the above means 12, when the first win / win lottery or the second win / win lottery is won in the specific mode, the probability that the win is due to the second win / win lottery is further increased. Therefore, the player can expect more to maintain the specific mode, and can further improve the interest.

Means 13. The production mode setting means,
When the lottery mode is set to the normal mode, an effect mode to be set when a winning result is obtained by the second win / loss lottery,
When the lottery mode is set to the normal mode, a winning result is obtained by the first win / loss lottery, and the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state is switched to the specific mode by the mode switching means. The production mode to set when it is set,
13. The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 12, wherein the same can be set.

  According to the above means 13, in the normal mode, the effect mode set when the winning result is obtained by the second winning / winning lottery, and the winning result by the first winning / winning lottery in which the lottery mode is switched to the specific mode. The effect mode set when obtained can be the same. Therefore, the player cannot determine whether the lottery mode is the normal mode or the specific mode (so-called latent probability mode) depending on the effect mode. As a result, the player can play the game with the expectation that it is not in the specific mode, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

Means 14. The game ball includes an opening state in which the ball can enter, and a specific ball entering means having a displacement member that can be displaced between a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter,
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a win result is obtained by the first win / loss lottery, and the lottery mode after the end of the first special game state is switched to the normal mode by the mode switching means. An opening and closing pattern in the displacement member when set,
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, it is possible to set the opening / closing pattern of the displacement member to be the same when the winning result is obtained by the second win / loss lottery. 14. The gaming machine according to any one of 1 to 13 for performing.

  According to the means 14, when the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, when the winning is generated by the second win / win lottery and when the win is generated by the first win / win lottery, the lottery mode is switched to the normal mode. The opening / closing pattern of the displacing member may be the same as in the effect mode. Therefore, the player cannot determine whether the specific mode is maintained or the normal mode is entered, depending on the opening / closing pattern of the displacement member. As a result, the interest for the player can be further improved.

Means 15. When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, when a winning result is obtained by the first win / loss lottery, a symbol that is stopped and displayed on the display means,
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, it is possible to set the same symbols as the symbols stopped and displayed on the display means when the winning result is obtained by the second win / loss lottery. 15. The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 14, characterized in that

  According to the above means 15, it is impossible to determine whether the first win / win lottery has been won or the second win / win lottery has been won based on the symbols stopped and displayed. Therefore, the player cannot further discriminate whether the specific mode is maintained or the normal mode is entered, and the interest for the player can be further improved.

Means 16. A launching means for launching a game ball,
A game area where the launched game balls are guided,
Starting ball entering means arranged in the game area,
Display means capable of variably displaying predetermined identification information,
Due to the entry of the game ball into the starting entry means, the first lottery means for performing the first win / loss lot with a first winning probability, and the entry of the game ball into the starting entry means. And a main control means having a second lottery means for conducting a second win / loss lottery with a second winning probability,
A sub-control means for controlling a predetermined display means based on the variation pattern command received from the main control means,
The main control means,
A first special game state generating means for generating a first special game state advantageous to the player when a winning result is obtained by the first win / loss lottery,
A mode in which the lottery mode after the end of the first special game state can be switched and set to at least a normal mode and a specific mode in which the first winning probability is higher than the first winning probability in the normal mode. Switching means,
Mode determination means for determining the type of lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state related to the winning result, when a winning result is obtained by the first winning / boring lottery;
Second special game state generation means for generating a second special game state which is less advantageous than the first special game state when a result of the second win / loss lottery is obtained,
A variation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns relating to the effect produced by the display means,
A variation pattern command output means for selecting one from the variation pattern storage means and outputting a variation pattern command corresponding to the selected variation pattern to the sub-control means,
The fluctuation pattern command includes mode information relating to a rendering mode in the display means being set when the fluctuation pattern is selected by the fluctuation pattern command output means,
The sub control means,
A mode information storage unit capable of storing mode information including the fluctuation pattern command input from the main control unit;
At least the production mode setting means capable of setting the production mode in the display means in consideration of the mode information stored in the mode information storage means,
When a winning result is obtained by the second winning / absence lottery, the gaming machine is capable of maintaining the first winning probability as it is when the winning result is obtained,
The fluctuation pattern command output means is
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, if a winning result is obtained by the second winning / discarding lottery, mode information included in the variation pattern command output after the second special gaming state,
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a win result is obtained by the first win / loss lottery, and the lottery mode after the end of the first special game state is switched to the normal mode by the mode switching means. If set, mode information included in the variation pattern command output after the first special game state,
A gaming machine characterized in that the same can be set.

  According to the above-mentioned means 16, basically the same operational effect as that of the above-mentioned means 1 is obtained.

  Further, according to the means 16, the lottery mode is specified with the mode information included in the variation pattern command set when the win is obtained in the second win / win lottery when the lottery mode is set to the specific mode. When the mode is set, a win is obtained in the first win / loss lottery, and the mode information included in the variation pattern command set when the lottery mode is switched to the normal mode can be set to be the same. Therefore, the sub-control unit can perform the process based on the mode information common to both, and the control process can be simplified.

Means 17. Trigger ball means (for example, through gate) provided at a position where only the game ball shot by the launching means can reach so as to pass through the second area,
Third lottery means for performing a third winning / lossing lottery (for example, open lottery) with a third winning probability due to entry or passage of a game ball into the opportunity entering means.
And a third display means for performing a stop display in a specific mode based on a lottery result of the third winning / losing lottery after performing the variable display.
When the winning result is obtained by at least the third winning / boring lottery, the opening condition is satisfied,
The second starting ball entering means,
When the predetermined opening condition is satisfied, the closed state is switched to the open state, and the opening and closing process is performed a predetermined number of times to be in the closed state when a specified time has elapsed or a specified number of game balls have entered. The gaming machine according to means 9, characterized in that the gaming machine is played.

  Means 18. At least the gaming state can be switched between a low ball entry state in which the ratio of the open state to the closed state per unit time in the second starting ball entry means is relatively low, and a relatively high ball entry state. 18. A game machine according to the means 17, characterized in that the game machine is provided with a ball entering state switching means.

  According to the above means 18, the ratio of the open state to the closed state per unit time in the second starting ball entering means increases in the high ball entering state, so that the second starting ball entering is performed as compared with the low entering ball state. The number of winnings to the means increases. Therefore, more lottery opportunities for the first win / loss lottery and the second win / win lottery can be obtained in a shorter period, and it becomes easier to win more first special game states and second special game states in a shorter period. In addition, in the high-income state, the total number of prize balls to be paid out inevitably increases as compared to the low-inclusion state, so the decrease in the number of balls held is relatively small, and the player decreases the number of balls held. It is not necessary to worry so much, and it is possible to concentrate on the game for winning the first special game state and the second special game state.

  Means 19. The gaming machine according to means 18, characterized in that the high-incidence state is a state that satisfies at least one of the following configurations (1) to (5).

(1) A state in which the variable display time on the third display means is shortened as compared with the low ball entry state (2) The specified time relating to the opening / closing processing of the second start ball entry means is compared with the low ball entry state Or a state in which the specified number has been increased compared to the low-ball-in state (3) When a winning result is obtained by the third winning / losing lottery, the number of times the opening / closing process is performed at one time is performed as described above. (4) A state in which the probability of winning in the third win / loss lot is higher than the probability of winning in the low ball entry state. According to the means 19, the high ball entry state is (1) ) To (4) in any combination [eg (1), (2), (3), (4), (1) and (2), (1) and (3), (1) and (1) 4), (2) and (3), (2) and (4), (3) and (4), (1) and (2) and (3) , (1) and (2) and (4), (1) and (3) and (4), (2) and (3) and (4), (1) and (2) and (3) and ( 4)] can be adopted.

  The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above means are applied is shown below.

  a. The game machine in each of the above means is a ball game machine. As a more detailed example, "operating means (game ball launching handle) operated by the player, launching means (launching motor, etc.) for playing and launching the game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and the launching There is a "ball game machine" provided with a game area in which the game balls are guided and each of the ball winning means (general winning hole, variable winning device, operating hole, etc.) arranged in the game area.

  b. The game machine in each of the above means is a ball-and-ball game machine having a game area extending substantially vertically. As a more detailed example, "operating means (game ball launching handle) operated by the player, launching means (launching motor, etc.) for playing and launching the game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and the launching A predetermined game area (for example, the game area is constituted by a game board surface or the like) that is guided along the game ball and extends substantially in the vertical direction, and each ball entering means (general winning opening, Variable winning device, actuating port, etc.), and is configured to be able to visually recognize the behavior of the game ball flowing down in the game area.

  c. The gaming machine or the ball game machine in each of the above means is a pachinko machine or a gaming machine similar to a pachinko machine.

  d. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a spinning-roller gaming machine such as a slot machine. As a more detailed example, "variable display of an identification information sequence (design sequence; specifically, a reel with a design, a rotating body such as a belt) including a plurality of identification information (designs) (specifically, a reel) The variable display means (specifically, a rotating body unit such as a reel unit) for stopping and displaying the identification information sequence after the rotation) is provided, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (specifically, the start lever). The fluctuation of the identification information (symbol) is started, the fluctuation of the identification information (symbol) is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (specifically, the stop button), and the identification is aligned on the effective line at the time of the stop. A spinning-roller type gaming machine configured to give a game value on condition that the information is specific identification information ”.

  e. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a gaming machine of a type in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are integrated (in particular, a gaming machine with a slot machine specification that uses a game ball as a game medium). As a more detailed example, "variable display of an identification information sequence (design sequence; specifically, a reel with a design, a rotating body such as a belt) including a plurality of identification information (designs) (specifically, a reel) The variable display means (specifically, a rotating body unit such as a reel unit) for stopping and displaying the identification information sequence after the rotation) is provided, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (specifically, the start lever). The fluctuation of the identification information (symbol) is started, the fluctuation of the identification information (symbol) is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (specifically, the stop button), and the identification is aligned on the effective line at the time of the stop. A game value is provided on condition that the information is specific identification information, and a ball saucer (upper plate or the like) is further provided to take in game balls from the ball saucer, and to the ball saucer. Payout means for paying out game balls Comprising a configuration and gaming machine "and the like as starting condition of the game is satisfied by the game ball is captured by the capturing means.

  10 ... Pachinko machine, 18 ... Handle, 30 ... Game board, 32 ... Variable winning device, 32a ... Large winning opening, 32b ... Opening plate, 33A ... Upper starting winning opening, 33B ... Lower starting winning opening, 34 ... Through gate, 35 ... Variable display device unit, 37 ... Electric accessory, 37a ... Movable blade, 42 ... Decorative pattern display device, 43L ... First special display device, 43R ... Second special display device, 44 ... Hold lamp, 45 ... Display control Device, 46a ... First holding lamp, 46b ... Second holding lamp, 60 ... Launching device, 261 ... Main control device, 262 ... Sub control device, 311 ... Dispensing control device, Xj ... Game state determination value.

Claims (2)

A launching means for launching a game ball,
A game area where the launched game balls are guided,
Starting ball entering means arranged in the game area,
First lottery means for performing a first win / loss lot with a first winning probability due to entry of a game ball into the starting entry means.
Second lottery means for performing a second win / loss lottery with a second winning probability due to the entry of the game balls into the starting ball entry means,
A first special game state generating means for generating a first special game state advantageous to the player when a winning result is obtained by the first win / loss lottery,
A mode in which the lottery mode after the end of the first special game state can be switched and set to at least a normal mode and a specific mode in which the first winning probability is higher than the first winning probability in the normal mode. Switching means,
Mode determination means for determining the type of lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state related to the winning result, when a winning result is obtained by the first winning / boring lottery;
Second special game state generation means for generating a second special game state which is less advantageous than the first special game state when a result of the second win / loss lottery is obtained,
Display means capable of variably displaying predetermined identification information,
Production mode setting means capable of setting the production mode in the display means to various modes,
Based on the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means, effect control means for controlling the effect on the display means,
Equipped with
A gaming machine in which, when a winning result is obtained by the second winning / absence lottery, the first winning probability when the winning result is obtained is maintained as it is,
The production mode setting means,
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, an effect mode to be set when a winning result is obtained by the second win / loss lottery,
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a winning result is obtained by the first win / loss lottery, and the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state is switched to the normal mode by the mode switching means. When the production mode is set to
Can be set der to the same thing is,
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a winning result is obtained by the second win / loss lottery, and after the effect modes on the display means are the same, the lottery by the first lottery means is performed. When the number of times is equal to or more than a prescribed number, the player is provided with information transmitting means for issuing information indicating that the lottery mode is set to the specific mode,
A game machine characterized in that the prescribed number of times includes at least a first number of times and a second number of times . The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

Images